GRD44B-5R User Manual: Difference between revisions

From Silbo Networks
No edit summary
No edit summary
 
(22 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 86: Line 86:
|1
|1
|Hostname
|Hostname
|45A05240882
|45A27240005
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device
|-
|-
Line 96: Line 96:
|3
|3
|Firmware Version  and IPK Version
|Firmware Version  and IPK Version
|1.16_1.13_RC4
|1.17_1.15
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Application  Firmware version and IPK version
|Application  Firmware version and IPK version
|1.03_1.12
|1.03_1.13
|This field  displays the software version of the device.
|This field  displays the software version of the device.
|-
|-
Line 107: Line 107:
|Kernel Version
|Kernel Version
|4.14.180
|4.14.180
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device
|This field displays the kernel version of the device
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Local Time
|Local Time
|Friday, July 19, 2024 at 11:52:23 AM
|Wednesday, December 18, 2024 at 12:56:00  PM
|This field  displays the local time
|This field  displays the local time
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Uptime
|Uptime
|1h 48m 3s
|5h 27m 5s
|This field  displays the uptime of the device
|This field  displays the uptime of the device
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Load Average
|Load Average
|0.66 0.29 0.17
|0.31 0.27 0.19
|This field  displays the average load
|This field displays the average load
|}
|}
'''Memory:'''
'''Memory:'''
Line 131: Line 131:


The specifications details are as follows.
The specifications details are as follows.
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable" style="height:auto; width:100%; text-align:center;"
|SN
!SN
|Field name
!Field name
|Sample value
!Sample value
|Description
!Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
Line 289: Line 289:
This page provides on screen System logging information. In this page the user gets to view the system logs.
This page provides on screen System logging information. In this page the user gets to view the system logs.


[[File:System Log.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B-5R System log.png|1024x1024px]]


=== 1.3 Kernel Log ===
=== 1.3 Kernel Log ===
Line 296: Line 296:
In this page the user gets to view the Kernel logs.
In this page the user gets to view the Kernel logs.


[[File:Kernel Log.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Kernel Log.png|1024x1024px]]
 




Line 305: Line 306:


* Network
* Network
* VLAN
* Sim Switch
* Sim Switch
* Internet
* Multi-WAN
* VPN
* VPN
* Firewall
* Firewall
* Loopback Rule
* Loopback Rule
* VRRP
* Remote Monitoring
* Remote Monitoring
* Tunnel
* Tunnel


[[File:Settings.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Settings.png|1024x1024px]]


=== 2.1 Network ===
=== 2.1 Network ===
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.


[[File:IAB44C Network Settings .png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B-5R Network configuration.png|1024x1024px]]


'''Ethernet Setting:'''
'''Ethernet Setting:'''
Line 324: Line 327:
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.


For this device 5 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.
For this device 5 ports are configured.


[[File:Setting_Ethernet_Settings.png|1024x1024px]]
Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well.


'''For port 5 settings,'''
Ethernet WAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP, Static and PPOE.


Kindly select the option '''LAN''' for '''Port 5 mode LAN/WAN'''. Based on the option selected the field will also change. The user needs to configure all the required field and click on save.
[[File:GRD44B-5R Ethernet settings.png|1024x1024px]]


[[File:For_port_5_setting.png|1024x1024px]]
'''EDIT:'''
 
To add a new Interface, click on ‘Add’.
 
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.
 
Once the changes are done click on the update button to save all the changes.
 
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.
 
[[File:GRD44B-5R Network configuration edit.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:  '''Type: WAN'''
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field name
|Field Name
|Sample value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Port 5 mode LAN/WAN
|Physical Device
|LAN
|Ex: eth0.5
|This field displays the port mode selection
|This indicates a network interface on which our  network is connected. This setting is by default (Editable).
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Port 5 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]
|Type
|1.) DHCP Server
|'''WAN'''/LAN
|This designates whether the interface is part of the WAN or LAN.
 
WAN: Connects the device to the internet.


2.) Static
LAN: Connects the device to the internal  network.
|This field  displays the  Ethernet mode selection
|-
| colspan="4" |                                                                     '''Protocol: Static'''
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Port 5 DHCP Server IP
|Static IP Address
 
|Ex: 192.168.1.10
Port 5 Static IP
|The manually assigned IP address for the  interface.
|1.) 192.168.10.1
 
2.) 5.6.7.8
|This field displays DHCP server and static IP configured.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Port 5 DHCP and Static Netmask
|Static Netmask
|255.255.255.0
|Ex: 255.255.255.0
|This field displays DHCP server and static Netmask address configured
|Subnet mask corresponding to the IP address.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Port 5 DHCP Start Address
|Static Gateway
|100
|Ex: 192.168.1.1
|This field displays DHCP server start address configured
|The IP address of the gateway (router) that the  interface will use to send traffic outside its own subnet.
|-
| colspan="4" |                                                                     '''Protocol: DHCP'''
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Port 5 DHCP Limit
|DHCP Gateway
|50
|Ex: 10.1.1.1
|This field displays DHCP server limit
|The IP address of the DHCP server (often the same as the router or gateway).
|}
Kindly select the option '''EWAN2''' for '''Port 5 mode LAN/WAN'''. Based on the option selected the field will also change. The user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.
 
[[File:Port_5_mode_LAN-WAN.png|1024x1024px]]
 
The specifications details are below.
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field name
|Sample value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
| colspan="4" |                                                                     '''Protocol: PPPoE'''
|Port 5 mode WAN
|EWAN2
|This  field displays the port mode selection
|-
|-
|2
|7
|Username
|Any Name
|The username provided by your ISP for PPPoE  authentication.
|-
|8
|Password
|*****
|The password provided by your ISP for PPPoE  authentication.
|-
|9
|Access Concentrator
|
|Typically, the name of the ISP's PPPoE server.
|-
|10
|Service Name
|
|Sometimes required by ISPs, this field  specifies a particular service offered by the ISP.
|-
|11
|Gateway
|Ex: 0.0.0.0
|The IP address used as the default route.
|-
|12
|MAC Address
|Ex: D0:93:95:B0:98:6B
|The hardware (MAC) address of the network  interface. This is unique to every network device.
|-
|13
|Override MAC Address
|Ex: D0:93:95:B0:98:6B
|This field allows you to manually set a  different MAC address if needed.


If left blank, the default MAC address is used.
|-
|14
|Create Firewall Zone
|Enable/Disable
|You can assign this interface to a particular  firewall zone, which determines its access rules (e.g., WAN zone for internet  traffic, LAN zone for internal traffic).
|-
| colspan="4" |'''Advanced Settings: Enable/Disable'''
|-
|15
|Broadcast
|Ex: 192.168.123.34
|Broadcast address for the network, typically  calculated based on the IP and subnet mask.
|-
|16
|Override MTU
|Ex: 1500
|MTU size controls the maximum packet size that  can be sent over the network.


Default is usually 1500 bytes.
|-
|17
|Delegate
|Enable/Disable
|If checked, it allows delegation of prefixes  for IPv6, often left unchecked unless needed.
|-
|18
|Force Link
|Enable/Disable
|Forces the interface to be up even if no  physical link is detected.
|-
|19
|IPv4 Route Table
|Enable/Disable
|This field is used to specify static routes for  IPv4.
|-
|20
|Table No.
|'''254''': Default  main routing table.


'''100''': Custom  routing table for specific purposes.
|'''Default Table (Main Table)''': Usually, there is a default routing table  (often Table No. 254 or 255) where all the routes are stored by default.


'''Custom Table''': You can  specify a different table number if you are managing multiple routing  policies (e.g., VoIP traffic, VPN traffic).
|}


|Ethernet Protocol Port 5  WAN
|1.) DHCP client


2.) Static
'''Type: LAN'''


3.) PPPoE
[[File:Grd44b 5r LAN config.png|1024x1024px]]


4.) PPTP


5.) L2TP
Specification details are given below:
|1.) Automatically obtains IP  address and network configuration from a DHCP server.
{| class="wikitable"
 
2.) Manually set a fixed IP  address and network configuration.
 
3.) Point-to-Point Protocol  over Ethernet, used for connecting to DSL services.
 
4.) Point-to-Point Tunnelling  Protocol, used for establishing VPN connections.
 
5.) Layer 2 Tunnelling  Protocol, another VPN protocol option.
|-
|3
|Gateway
|192.168.1.1
|This field displays gateway address  configured
|}
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.
 
 
'''SW_LAN settings,'''
 
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN.
 
'''Note:''' After any changes made, save and update the page below.
 
[[File:SW_LAN_Settings.png|1024x1024px]]
 
The specifications details are below.
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field  name
|Field  Name
|Sample  value
|Sample  Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol
|Physical Device
|DHCP  Server
|Ex: eth0.1
|This field  displays the Ethernet  mode selection.
|This is the network interface identifier.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP
|Type
|192.168.10.1
|WAN/'''LAN'''
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured which can be changed accordingly.
|This designates whether the interface is part  of the WAN or LAN.
 
WAN: Connects the device to the internet.
 
LAN: Connects the device to the internal network.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask
|Protocol
|255.255.255.0
|Static
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask  address configured.
|This means that the IP address, netmask, and  other network settings are manually configured rather than being  automatically assigned by a DHCP server.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address
|IP Address
|100
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|This field displays DHCP server start address configured.
|This is the static IP address assigned to the interface. It acts as the gateway IP address for devices connected to this  LAN.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit
|Static Netmask
|50
|Ex: 255.255.255.0
|This field displays DHCP server limit.
|This is the subnet mask for the network.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|DNS  Server
|MAC Address
|1
|Ex: D0:93:95:B0:98:6C
|This filed display number of DNS server availability.
|This is the hardware (MAC) address of the network interface, which uniquely identifies this device on the network.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|DNS  Server Address
|Override MAC Address
|8.8.8.8
|
|This filed display the DNS  server address.
|This allows you to manually enter a different  MAC address if needed.
|}
|-
|8
|Enable DNS
|Enable/Disable
|If this option is enabled, the interface will  act as a DNS resolver for the devices on the LAN, using the specified DNS  server.
|-
|9
|DNS Server Address
|Ex: 8.8.8.8
|This is the IP address of the DNS server that will be used by devices on the LAN to resolve domain names to IP addresses.


More than one DNS Address can be added.
|-
|10
|Enable DHCP Server
|Enable/Disable
|If enabled, this setting allows the interface  to function as a DHCP server, automatically assigning IP addresses to devices  connected to the LAN.
|-
|11
|DHCP Start Address
|70
|The DHCP server will begin assigning IP  addresses starting from 192.168.10.70
|-
|12
|DHCP Limit
|100
|This specifies the number of IP addresses the  DHCP server can assign. Starting at 192.168.10.70 and with a limit of 100,  the server can assign addresses up to 192.168.10.169.
|-
|13
|Lease Time Duration
|Hours-(H)


After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.
Minutes-(M)
 


'''Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol:'''
Seconds-(S)
|'''Hours-(H)''': This  indicates that the lease time for each IP address assignment is measured in  hours.


Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.
'''Minutes-(M):''' This  indicates that the lease time for each IP address assignment is measured in minutes.


'''Note:''' After any changes made, save and update the page below.
'''Seconds-(S):''' This  indicates that the lease time for each IP address assignment is measured in seconds.
 
|-
[[File:Static_option_for_SW_LAN_Ethernet_Protocol.png|1024x1024px]]
|14
 
|Lease Time
The specifications details are below.
|12
{| class="wikitable"
|The DHCP lease time is set to 12 hours. After  this period, a device must renew its IP address lease with the DHCP server to  continue using the assigned IP address.
|SN
|Field name
|Sample value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|15
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol
|Create Firewall Zone
|Static
|Enable/Disable
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection
|You can assign this interface to a particular firewall zone, which determines its access rules (e.g., WAN zone for internet traffic, LAN zone for internal traffic).
|-
|-
|2
|16
|SW_LAN static IP
|Internet Over SW_LAN
|192.168.5.1
|Enable/Disable
|This field displays static server IP configured.
|Allow all outbound traffic from the LAN to the internet.
|-
|-
|3
| colspan="4" |'''Advanced Settings: Enable/Disable'''
|SW_LAN  Netmask
|255.255.255.0
|This field displays static server Netmask  address configured
|-
|-
|4
|17
|DNS  Server
|Broadcast
|1
|Ex: 192.168.123.34
|This filed display number of DSN server availability
|Broadcast address for the network, typically calculated based on the IP and subnet mask.
|-
|-
|5
|18
|DSN  Server Address
|Override MTU
|8.8.8.8
|Ex: 1500
|This filed display the DSN server address.
|MTU size controls the maximum packet size that can be sent over the network.
|}
 
 
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.


Default is usually 1500 bytes.
|-
|19
|Delegate
|Enable/Disable
|If checked, it allows delegation of prefixes  for IPv6, often left unchecked unless needed.
|-
|20
|Force Link
|Enable/Disable
|Forces the interface to be up even if no  physical link is detected.
|-
|21
|IPv4 Route Table
|Enable/Disable
|This field is used to specify static routes for  IPv4.
|}
Save and Update once configuration changes have been made.


'''Cellular Setting:'''
'''Relay Server:'''
 
A relay server typically functions in a network to forward requests (usually DHCP or DNS) from clients to
 
a designated server when the server is on a different network segment.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Relay server.png|1024x1024px]]
 
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.
 
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.
 
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.


In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.
[[File:GRD44B 5R Relay server edit.png|1024x1024px]]


Select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV6.


[[File:Cellular Setting.png|1024x1024px]]
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field name
|Field Name
|Sample  value
|Sample  Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Cellular Enable
|Interface
|Checkbox
|1.)    eth0.1
|Check this box to  enable cellular functionality.
 
2.)    ra0
|1) eth0.1  typically represents a VLAN where the relay will listen for client requests.
 
2) If your  device is broadcasting a Wi-Fi network on the ra0 interface, any DHCP or DNS  relay settings will apply to devices connected via this wireless interface.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Cellular Operation Mode
|Start IP Address
|1.) Single Cellular with Dual Sim
|Ex: 192.168.10.100
 
|This is the beginning IP address of the range that will be leased out to clients.
2.) Single Cellular with  Single SIM
|1.) This mode allows you to use one cellular modem with two SIM cards.
 
2.) This mode allows you to use one cellular modem with single SIM card.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Cellular  Modem 1
|End IP  Address
|Ex: 192.168.10.150
|An IP address  that is in the same subnet as the Start IP Address and allows sufficient  addresses to be leased.
|-
|4
|Netmask
|Ex: 255.255.255.0
|A valid  subnet mask such as 255.255.255.0 (for a /24 network), or 255.255.0.0 (for a  /16 network).
|-
|5
|Lease Time
|For a 24-hour  lease time, set this value to 86400.
|This is the  amount of time that an IP address is assigned to a client before it needs to  request a renewal from the DHCP server.
|}
Save and update.
 
 
'''Cellular Setting:'''
 
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.
 
Select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV6.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Cellular settings.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field name
|Sample  value
|Description
|-
|1
|Cellular Enable
|Checkbox
|Check this box to  enable cellular functionality.
|-
|2
|Cellular  Operation Mode
|1.) Single Cellular with Dual Sim
 
2.) Single Cellular with  Single SIM
|1.) This mode  allows you to use one cellular modem with two SIM cards.
 
2.) This mode allows you to  use one cellular modem with single SIM card.
|-
|3
|Cellular  Modem 1
|QuectelEC200A
|QuectelEC200A
|This  field displays the modem name.
|This  field displays the modem name.
Line 592: Line 741:
|-
|-
|10
|10
|SIM 1 MTU
|Ex: 1500 (a common MTU size)
|'''MTU (Maximum  Transmission Unit)''' defines the largest size of a data packet that can be  transmitted over the network.
|-
|11
|Choose SIM 2 APN Mode
|Choose SIM 2 APN Mode
|1.) Auto
|1.) Auto
Line 600: Line 754:
2.) Choose manual to enter the APN settings manually in case of  M2M SIM cards.
2.) Choose manual to enter the APN settings manually in case of  M2M SIM cards.
|-
|-
|11
|12
|SIM 2 Access Point Name
|SIM 2 Access Point Name
|airtelgprs.com
|airtelgprs.com
|Enter the APN  provided by your cellular service provider in case of M2M sim. For regular  sim cards APN name will be displayed automatically.
|Enter the APN  provided by your cellular service provider in case of M2M sim. For regular  sim cards APN name will be displayed automatically.
|-
|-
|12
|13
|SIM 2 PDP Type
|SIM 2 PDP Type
|IPV4
|IPV4
|Choose the  PDP type, which is typically either IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the sim card.
|Choose the  PDP type, which is typically either IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the sim card.
|-
|-
|13
|14
|SIM 2 Username
|SIM 2 Username
|
|
|Enter the  username if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
|Enter the  username if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
|-
|-
|14
|15
|SIM 2 Password
|SIM 2 Password
|
|
|Enter the  password if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
|Enter the  password if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
|-
|-
|15
|16
|SIM 2 Authentication Protocol
|SIM 2 Authentication Protocol
|None
|None
|Choose the  authentication protocol. Options typically include None, PAP, or CHAP.
|Choose the  authentication protocol. Options typically include None, PAP, or CHAP.
|-
|-
|16
|17
|SIM 2 MTU
|Ex: 1500 (a common MTU size)
|'''MTU  (Maximum Transmission Unit)''' defines the largest size of a data packet  that can be transmitted over the network.
|-
|18
|Primary SIM Switchback Enable
|Enable/Disable
|When enabled,  the device will automatically switch back to the primary SIM (SIM 1) after  switching to SIM 2, under certain conditions (e.g., SIM 1 regains network  availability).
|-
|19
|Primary SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)
|Primary SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)
|10
|10
|Enter the  time in minutes after which the system should switch back to the primary SIM  if it becomes available.
|Enter the  time in minutes after which the system should switch back to the primary SIM  if it becomes available.
|}
|}
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.


'''Band lock and Operator Lock:'''
'''Band lock and Operator Lock:'''
Line 638: Line 806:
Bands available in the drop-down list.
Bands available in the drop-down list.


[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Band and operator lock.png|1024x1024px]]


'''2G/3G option:'''
'''2G/3G option:'''


2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV.


[[File:2G-3G option.png|1024x1024px]]
While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.


The user should select the band check box available for 2g/3g from the given list. Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available in that area.
 
''*Refer the image below*''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R 2g-3g.png|1024x1024px]]
 
The user should select the band check box available for 2g/3g from the given list. Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available in that area.


'''Operator Selection Mode:'''
'''Operator Selection Mode:'''
Line 654: Line 827:
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.


[[File:Band and Operator Lock settings 2.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Operator selection mode.png|1024x1024px]]
 


If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.


[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Operator code.png|1024x1024px]]


After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.


'''Wi-Fi Setting:'''
'''Wi-Fi Setting:'''
Line 666: Line 841:
In this, router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.
In this, router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.


The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need.  
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need.
 
[[File:Wifi General Settings .png|1024x1024px]]
 


[[File:GRD44B 5R Wifi settings.png|1024x1024px]]


It has 3 radio modes.
It has 3 radio modes.
Line 680: Line 853:
Access point and client
Access point and client


[[File:Access Point mode.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Access point.png|1024x1024px]]  
 


'''Access Point mode:'''
'''Access Point mode:'''
Line 686: Line 860:
In Access Point mode, a configuration in which a router, allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network by creating a Wi-Fi hotspot.
In Access Point mode, a configuration in which a router, allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network by creating a Wi-Fi hotspot.


[[File:Access Point mode.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44b 5R Access point.png|1024x1024px]]  




'''Client point:'''  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID & client passphrase.
'''Client point:'''  
 
In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID & client passphrase.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Client point.png|1024x1024px]]


[[File:Client Point RC44.png|1024x1024px]]


'''Access point and client point''':
'''Access point and client point''':
Line 697: Line 874:
Select this option for both type of connection, give both SSID and passphrase.
Select this option for both type of connection, give both SSID and passphrase.


[[File:Access point and client point.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Access point and client point.png|1024x1024px]]


After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.


The specifications details are below.
The specifications details are below.
Line 792: Line 968:
(50 value is default)
(50 value is default)
|}
|}
Click on save once changes have been made.  
Click on save once changes have been made.
 
 
 
'''Guest Wifi:'''
 
This option enables a separate Wi-Fi network for guests, isolated from the main network to enhance security and privacy. Guest Wi-Fi allows visitors or temporary users to connect to your network without accessing the main LAN resources.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R GUEST WIFI.png|1024x1024px]]


'''Wireless Schedule:'''
'''Wireless Schedule:'''
Line 802: Line 986:
'''Note:''' This section is turned off by default, tick the box to activate it.
'''Note:''' This section is turned off by default, tick the box to activate it.


[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R WIRELESS SCHEDULE.png|1024x1024px]]  


After configuring all the required information, the user should click on save and then click on update to update all the required information.
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on save and then click on update to update all the required information.
Line 808: Line 992:
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the Wi-Fi working hours.
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the Wi-Fi working hours.


[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R SCHEDULE WIFI.png|965x965px]]


'''Loop back IP settings:'''
'''SMS Settings:'''


The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost.” it is used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page.


The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine.
This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the


It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.
router device.


1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and


However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting>>Network configuration>> Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.
adding the mobile numbers below respectively.


[[File:Loopback Update.png|1024x1024px]]
API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS.


After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.
Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.
 
 
'''SMS Settings:'''


User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page.
After addition of the mobile number’s user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.


This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device.
''*Refer the image below*''


1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively.
[[File:GRD44B 5R SMS ENABLE.png|1024x1024px]]


API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS.


Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice. After addition of the mobile number’s user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.
1.) Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the tab where you want to find the alert and click on '''‘SMS Response Enable’''', '''‘save’''' and '''‘update’''' button.
 
[[File:SMS Settings V2.png|1024x1024px]]
 
1.) Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the tab where you want to find the alert and click on '''‘SMS Response Enable’''', '''‘save’''' and '''‘update’''' button.  


2.) Now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number.
2.) Now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number.
Line 847: Line 1,024:


4.) After that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again.
4.) After that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again.


Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.
Line 855: Line 1,031:
2) {"device”: ["passkey ","API key"],"command”: “uptime"}
2) {"device”: ["passkey ","API key"],"command”: “uptime"}


'''Loop back IP settings:'''
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost.” it is used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine.
It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting>>Network configuration>> Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.
[[File:GRD44 5R LOOPBACK IP SETTINGS.png|1024x1024px]]
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.
=== 2.2 VLAN ===
'''VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network)''' is a network within a network that segregates traffic into different logical networks on the same physical hardware. VLANs help in managing traffic more effectively and securely.


After configuring all the required information, the user should click on save and then click on update to update all the required information.
It is further divided into 2 sections,


=== 2.2 SIM Switch ===
Port-Based VLAN
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.


[[File:SIM Switch.png|1024x1024px]]
Tagged Port Configuration


The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.


[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|1024x1024px]]
'''Port-Based VLAN:'''


Once the user selects on “'''signal strength'''” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.
A VLAN configuration method where network ports are assigned to specific VLANs.


[[File:SIM Switch Configuration.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R VLAN.png|1024x1024px]]


'''EDIT:'''


'''Threshold RSRP:'''
To add a new VLAN ID, click on ‘Add Device’.


This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. (In General, a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.


'''Threshold SINR:'''
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.


This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. (In General, a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.


Once the user selects on “'''Data Limit'''” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.
[[File:GRD44B 5R VLAN CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]


[[File:Threshold SINR.png|1024x1024px]]
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field name
|Field Name
|Sample  value
|Sample  Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|SIM Switch Based on
|'''VLAN ID'''
|Data Limit
|1
|The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.
|This is a unique identifier for a VLAN within a network.
 
|-
|-
|2
|2
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)
|'''Port 0'''
|1000
|Untagged
|The user needs to  set the limit for the data usage for SIM 1.
|When a port is set as untagged for a VLAN, it  means that traffic entering or exiting this port is automatically associated  with that VLAN without any VLAN tags being added to the frames.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)
|'''Port 1'''
|1000
|Untagged
|The user needs to  set the limit for the data usage for SIM 2.
|
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Periodicity
|'''Port 2'''
|Daily
|tagged
|The user needs to  set the pattern/frequency to switch the sims.
|When a port is set as tagged for a VLAN, it  means that traffic on this port will include VLAN tags in the Ethernet  frames. These tags carry the VLAN ID, allowing switches and other devices to  know which VLAN the traffic belongs to.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Day Of Month
|'''Port 3'''
|For Ex: 16
|Untagged
|The user needs to set the day for switching the sim.
|
|-
|6
|'''Port 4'''
|OFF
|When a port is marked as off for a VLAN, it means that the port is not participating in that VLAN at all. It will neither  send nor receive traffic associated with that VLAN.
|}
|}
Save and update the page.
'''Tagged Port Configuration:'''
[[File:GRD44B 5R TAGGED BASED VLAN.png|1024x1024px]]


=== 2.3 Internet ===
'''EDIT:'''
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the diverse options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.


[[File:Internet Connection Configurtion.png|1024x1024px]]
To add a new VLAN ID, click on ‘Add Device’.


If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.


[[File:EWAN2 Edit Options.png|973x973px]]
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.


The specifications details are below.
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R TAGGED BASED VLAN CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field name
|Field Name
|Sample  value
|Sample  Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Name
|Type
|EWAN2
|802.1Q
|This field displays the name of the WAN connection
|'''IEEE 802.1Q''' is the standard protocol for VLAN tagging in Ethernet networks.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Priority
|Parent Interface
|1
|Port 2
|In this dropdown  box the user needs to select the priority.
|It is the underlying physical interface like port 2 that carries the VLAN-tagged traffic.
|-
|}
|3
Save and update the page.
|Select Track IP Numbers
 
|2
=== 2.3 SIM Switch ===
|In this dropdown  the user needs to select the track number for the Ips. This specifies  the number of IP addresses that will be used for tracking the status of the  connection.
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.
|-
|4
|TrackIP1
|8.8.8.8
|This is the first IP address used for tracking the connection. <code>8.8.8.8</code>  is a public DNS server provided by Google.
|-
|5
|TrackIP2
|8.8.4.4
|This is the second IP address used for  tracking the connection. <code>8.8.4.4</code>  is another public DNS server provided by Google.
|-
|6
|Reliability
|1
|This indicates the reliability threshold  for considering the connection as up. A value of <code>1</code> typically means that only one successful ping  response is needed to deem the connection reliable.
|-
|7
|Count
|1
|This specifies the number of consecutive  pings sent to the track IP addresses.
|-
|8
|Up
|1
|This indicates the number of successful  pings required to consider the connection as up.
|-
|9
|Down
|1
|This indicates the number of failed pings  required to consider the connection as down.
|}
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.


=== 2.4 VPN ===
[[File:GRD44B 5R SIM SWITCH CONFIGURE.png|1024x1024px]]
VPN stands for '''Virtual Private Network''', it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.


Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.


Navigate to settings >= VPN, general settings and you will see all VPN options you wish to use.
[[File:GRD44B 5R SIM SWITCH CONFIGURE 2.png|1024x1024px]]


Refer the below figure.


[[File:VPN Configuration General Settings.png]]
Once the user selects on “'''signal strength'''” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.


There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.
[[File:GRD44B 5R SIM SIGNAL STRENGTH.png|1024x1024px]]


* General Settings
'''Threshold RSRP:'''
* IPSEC
* Open VPN
* Wireguard
* Zerotier


'''General Settings:'''
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. (In General, a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).


In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device. The user must select from IPSEC, Open VPN, Wireguard or Zerotier based on its requirement. If required, the user can select all the options. The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its use.
'''Threshold SINR:'''


[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|1024x1024px]]
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. (In General, a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)


'''IPSEC:'''
Once the user selects on “'''Data Limit'''” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.
 
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks.
 
To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.
 
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.
 
[[File:IAB44C Ipsec VPN Dashboard.png|973x973px]]
 
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.
 
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.
 
[[File:IAB44C Ipsec Edit Options.png|975x975px]]
 
Click on update once done with configurations.
 
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.
 
[[File:VPN Configurtaion IPSEC .png|974x974px]]


 
[[File:GRD44B 5R DATALIMIT SET.png|1024x1024px]]
Detailed specifications are below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
Line 1,035: Line 1,181:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|IPSEC
|SIM Switch Based on
|Site to Site VPN
|Data Limit
|In this dropdown the user should select the  IPSEC connection type.
|The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.
 
|-
|-
|2
|2
|IPSEC Role
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)
|Client/Server
|1000
|In this dropdown  box the user needs to select the IPSEC role. The device is acting as a  client in the VPN setup (in this example).
|The user needs to set the limit for the data usage for SIM 1.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Connection Type
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)
|Tunnel
|1000
|In this dropdown  the user needs to select the connection type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.
|The user needs to set the limit for the data usage for SIM 2.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Connection mode
|Periodicity
|Route/add/'''start'''/trap
|Daily
|In this drop down list the user should select the mode for the connection. In this example '''start'''  is selected which means the VPN connection is initiated automatically.
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to switch the sims.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Remote Server IP
|Day Of Month
|********
|For Ex: 16
|The IP address of the remote VPN server.
|The user needs to  set the day for switching the sim.
|}
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.
 
=== 2.4 Multi-WAN ===
As shown below, this section has 4 categories,
 
'''Status'''
 
'''General settings'''
 
'''Failover'''
 
'''Load Balancing'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R MULTI WAN CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]
 
 
In '''‘Status’''' tab user can see the active network connections on the device as shown above.
 
'''General Settings:'''
 
In general settings, select any one option from the drop-down menu which you wish to imply and click on save and update.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R FAILOVER .png|1024x1024px]]
 
 
Click on save and update.
 
'''Failover:'''
 
'''NOTE:''' Please verify that the name to be added is in the interface section of the status tab.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R FAILOVER 1.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R FAILOVER CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]
 
 
The specifications details are below.
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field name
|Sample  value
|Description
|-
|-
|6
|1
|Local ID
|Priority
|3.3.3.3
|Ex: 5
|The user needs to set the local id. It is the identification for the local VPN client.
|Setting a priority of 1 means this connection has the highest priority and will be used before any others with a higher  priority number.
|-
|-
|7
|2
|No. of local subnets
|Select Track IP Numbers
|1
|2
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how many subnets will be connected.
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips. This specifies the number of IP addresses  that will be used for tracking the status of the connection.
|-
|-
|8
|3
|Local Subnet 1
|TrackIP1
|172.16.31.25/32
|8.8.8.8
|In this text box  the user needs to put the specific local subnet included in the VPN.
|The system  will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and working.  You can even add any whitelisted IP.
|-
|-
|9
|4
|Remote id
|TrackIP2
|1.1.1.1
|8.8.4.4
|In this text box  the user needs to put the id of the remote connection. It is the identification for the remote VPN server.
|The system  will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and workingYou can even add any whitelisted IP.
|-
|-
|10
|5
|No of remote subnet
|Reliability
|1
|1
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how many subnets it will be connected remotely.
|If reliability is set to 1, it might mean the connection is considered reliable  if it successfully pings at least one of the tracked IP addresses.
|-
|-
|11
|6
|Remote subnet
|Count
|10.1.1.0/24
|1
|In this text box the user needs to put the address of the remote subnet. The specific remote subnet included in the VPN.
|Setting Count to 1 means the device will send one ping to each IP address to check for connectivity.
|-
|-
|12
|7
|Key exchange
|Up
|Ikev1
|3
|In this dropdown the user should select the which key exchange version to be selected.
|If set to 3, the connection will be considered "up" only if all three pings are  successful.
|-
|-
|13
|8
|Aggressive
|Down
|Yes/No
|3
|In this dropdown the user should select either yes or no.
|If set to 3, the connection will be considered "down" if all three pings fail.
|}
Click on save and update tab.
 
'''Load Balancing:'''
 
Load balancing is a network management technique used to distribute traffic across multiple network connections or servers to optimize resource use, maximize throughput, minimize response time, and ensure reliability.
 
'''Task''': Distributes network traffic evenly across multiple connections (e.g., multiple WAN links) or servers.
 
'''Purpose''': This ensures that no single connection or server is overwhelmed with too much traffic, which could lead to congestion and slower performance.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R LOAD BALANCING.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R LOAD BALANCING CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|-
|14
|1
|IKE Lifetime (In Seconds)
|Traffic Distribution Ratio
|86400
|Ex: 60%
|The lifetime of the IKE phase in seconds  (1 day).
|If you have  two connections and set one to 60% and the other to 40%, traffic will be  distributed accordingly.
 
The ratio must be the same for CWAN1_0 and CWAN1_1.
|-
|-
|15
|2
|Lifetime (in seconds)
|Select Track IP Numbers
|28800
|2
|The lifetime of the IPsec SA (Security Association) in seconds (8 hours).
|The system  will track two IP addresses to determine if the network connection is active and reliable.
|-
|-
|16
|3
|Enable DPD Detection
|TrackIP1
|'''1'''
|8.8.8.8
 
|The system will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and workingYou can even add any whitelisted IP.
0
|Indicates whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable this option as per server-side settings.
|-
|-
|17
|4
|Time Interval (In Seconds)
|TrackIP2
|60
|8.8.4.4
|This option is available only if DPD  Detection is enabled. The time interval is the interval for DPD checks.
|The system  will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and working. You can even add any whitelisted IP.
|-
|-
|18
|5
|Action
|Reliability
|'''Restart'''/clear/hold/
|1
 
|With a reliability setting of 1, the connection might be considered reliable if at least one ping is successful.
trap/start
|'''Restart''': Action to take when DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per server-side setting.
|-
|-
|19
|6
|Authentication Method
|Count
|'''PSK'''
|1
|'''PSK''': Pre-shared  key is used for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per  sever side setting.
|The system  will send one ping to each tracked IP to check the connection's status.
|-
|-
|20
|7
|Multiple Secrets
|Up
|1/'''0'''
|3
|Indicates whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.
|The system requires 3 successful pings for the connection to be marked as  "up."
|-
|-
|21
|8
|PSK Value
|Down
|******
|3
|Pre-shared key value (masked for security).
|If 3 pings fail, the system will mark the connection as "down," and it may  switch to an alternate connection if available.
|}
|}
{| class="wikitable"
Click on save and update tab.
| colspan="7" |'''Proposal settings Phase I'''
|-
|22
| colspan="2" |'''Encryption Algorithm'''
| colspan="3" |AES 128


AES 192
=== 2.5 VPN ===
VPN stands for '''Virtual Private Network''', it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.


'''AES 256'''
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.


3DES
Navigate to settings >= VPN, general settings and you will see all VPN options you wish to use.
|'''AES 256''': Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.
|-
|23
| colspan="2" |Authentication Phase I
| colspan="3" |SHA1


MD5
Refer the below figure.


SHA 256
[[File:GRD44B 5R VPN CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]


SHA 384
There are 7 types of setting available under VPN configuration.


'''SHA 512'''
* General Settings
|'''SHA 512''': Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.
* IPSEC
* Open VPN
* Wireguard
* Zerotier
* PPTP
* L2TP


Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.
|-
|24
| colspan="2" |DH Group
| colspan="3" |MODP768(group1)


MODP1024(group2)
'''General Settings:'''


MODP1536(group5)
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device. The user must select from the above VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select all the options. The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its use.


'''MODP2048(group14)'''
[[File:GRD44B 5R VLAN CONFIG GENERAL SETTINGS.png|1024x1024px]]


MODP3072(group15)
'''IPSEC:'''


MODP4096(group16)
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks.
|'''MODP2048 (group14)''':  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.
 
To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.


Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.
|-
| colspan="7" |'''Proposal settings Phase II'''
|-
| colspan="2" |25
| colspan="2" |Hash Algorithm
|AES 128


AES 192
[[File:GRD44B 5R VPN CONFIGURATION IPSEC.png|1024x1024px]]The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.


'''AES 256'''
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.


3DES
[[File:GRD44B 5R VPN CONFIGURATION IPSEC CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]
| colspan="2" |'''AES 256''': Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.
|-
| colspan="2" |26
| colspan="2" |Authentication Phase II
|SHA1


MD5
Click on update once done with configurations.


SHA 256
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.


SHA 384
[[File:GRD44B 5R ipsec configured.png|1024x1024px]]


'''SHA 512'''
IPSEC VPN has been Eshtablished.
| colspan="2" |'''SHA 512''': Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.


Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.
Detailed specifications are below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field name
|Sample value
|Description
|-
|-
| colspan="2" |27
|1
| colspan="2" |PFS Group
|IPSEC
|MODP768(group1)
|Site to Site VPN
 
|In this dropdown the user should select the IPSEC connection type.
MODP1024(group2)
 
MODP1536(group5)
 
'''MODP2048(group14)'''
 
MODP3072(group15)
 
MODP4096(group16)
| colspan="2" |'''MODP2048 (group14)''': Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.
 
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.
|}
Click on save and then update the page for changes to reflect.
 
'''Open VPN:'''
 
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can function as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway.
 
To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.
 
[[File:Open VPN Settings .png|975x975px]]
 
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”
 
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.
 
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.
 
[[File:Open VPN Dashboard.png]]
 
VPN has been established.
 
'''WireGuard:'''
 
'''WireGuard''' is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.
 
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.
 
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|1024x1024px]]
 
EDIT:
 
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Click on the save button after the required configuration.
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field name
|Sample  value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|2
|Wireguard Role
|IPSEC Role
|Client/Server
|Client/Server
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select the wireguard role.
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select the IPSEC role. The device is acting as a  client in the VPN setup (in this example).
|-
|2
|Listen Port
|51820
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|IP Addresses
|Connection Type
|10.0.0.1/24
|Tunnel
|The IP address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client's interface. This address is used within the VPN.
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Allowed PeerIPs
|Connection mode
|10.1.1.1
|Route/add/'''start'''/trap
|The IP address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client. This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.
|In this drop down list the user should select the mode for the connection. In this example '''start''' is selected which means the VPN connection is initiated automatically.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Endpoint HostIP
|Remote Server IP
|10.1.1.1
|********
|The IP address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).
|The IP address of the remote VPN server.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Endpoint HostPort
|Local ID
|51820
|3.3.3.3
|The port on the WireGuard server to which the client connects.
|The user needs to set the local id. It is the identification for the local VPN client.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|PeerPublicKey
|No. of local subnets
|*****
|1
|The public key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how many subnets will be connected.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Enable Preshared key
|Local Subnet 1
|Yes/No
|172.16.31.25/32
|This option indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.
|In this text box the user needs to put the specific local subnet included in the VPN.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Preshared key
|Remote id
|*****
|1.1.1.1
|The actual pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option appears only if you have enabled preshared key.
|In this text box the user needs to put the id of the remote connection. It is the identification for the remote VPN server.
|}
|-
'''Zerotier:'''
|10
 
|No of remote subnet
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.
|1
 
|In this dropdown  the user needs to select how many subnets it will be connected remotely.
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on "Create a Network". This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.
|-
 
|11
Go to settings => VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.
|Remote subnet
 
|10.1.1.0/24
[[File:Zero Tier Enabling.png|974x974px]]
|In this text box  the user needs to put the address of the remote subnet. The specific  remote subnet included in the VPN.
 
|-
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.
|12
 
|Key exchange
[[File:Zero tier Unique ID.png]]
|Ikev1
 
|In this dropdown  the user should select the which key exchange version to be selected.
[[File:Zerotier Connection.png]]
 
Click on the save button after the required configuration.
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field name
|Sample  value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|13
|NetworkID
|Aggressive
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4
|Yes/No
|In this dropdown  box the user needs to paste the unique 16-digit network id.
|In this dropdown  the user should select either yes or no.
|-
|-
|2
|14
|Listen Port
|IKE Lifetime (In Seconds)
|9993
|86400
|Default
|The lifetime of the IKE phase in seconds  (1 day).
 
|-
|}
|15
 
|Lifetime (in seconds)
=== 2.5 Firewall ===
|28800
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.
|The lifetime of the IPsec SA (Security  Association) in seconds (8 hours).
 
|-
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|1024x1024px]]
|16
 
|Enable DPD Detection
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.
|'''1'''


* General Settings
0
* Port forwards
|Indicates whether Dead Peer Detection is  enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable this option as per server-side  settings.
* Traffic Rules
|-
* SNAT traffic Rules
|17
* Parental Control
|Time Interval (In Seconds)
* Zone Forwarding
|60
 
|This option is available only if DPD  Detection is enabled. The time interval is the interval for DPD checks.
'''General Settings:'''
 
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,
 
1.) General settings
 
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.
 
[[File:Firewall Configuration 1.png]]
 
{| class="wikitable"
|'''SN'''
|'''Field Name'''
|'''Sample Value'''
|'''Description'''
|-
|-
|1
|18
|Enable SYN-flood protection
|Action
|Enabled
|'''Restart'''/clear/hold/
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed  if required.
 
trap/start
|'''Restart''':  Action to take when DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection).  Select as per server-side setting.
|-
|-
|2
|19
|Disable IPV6
|Authentication Method
|Disabled
|'''PSK'''
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed  if required.
|'''PSK''': Pre-shared  key is used for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per  sever side setting.
|-
|-
|3
|20
|Drop invalid packets
|Multiple Secrets
|Disabled
|1/'''0'''
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
|Indicates whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.
|-
|-
|4
|21
|TCP SYN Cookies
|PSK Value
|Disabled
|******
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
|Pre-shared key value (masked for security).
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|
| colspan="6" |'''Proposal settings  Phase I'''
|-
|-
|5
|22
|Input
| colspan="2" |'''Encryption Algorithm'''
|Reject/Accept
| colspan="3" |AES 128
|By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
 
AES 192
 
'''AES 256'''
 
3DES
|'''AES 256''': Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.
|-
|-
|6
|23
|Output
| colspan="2" |Authentication Phase I
|Reject/Accept
| colspan="3" |SHA1
|By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs  to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
 
|-
MD5
|7
|Forward
|Reject/Accept
|By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs  to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
|}
2.) Zone settings


In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.
SHA 256


[[File:Firewall Zone Settings.png]]
SHA 384


'''Port Forwards:'''
'''SHA 512'''
|'''SHA 512''': Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.


Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.
|-
|24
| colspan="2" |DH Group
| colspan="3" |MODP768(group1)


It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.
MODP1024(group2)


This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.
MODP1536(group5)
[[File:Firewall Enabled.png]]


EDIT:
'''MODP2048(group14)'''


[[File:Firewall Configuration 2.png]]
MODP3072(group15)


Click on the save button after the required configuration.
MODP4096(group16)
{| class="wikitable"
|'''MODP2048 (group14)''':  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.
|SN
 
|Field name
Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.
|Sample value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
| colspan="7" |'''Proposal settings Phase II'''
|Name
|Example: <code>Web_Server_Forward</code>
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.
|-
|-
|2
| colspan="2" |25
|Protocol
| colspan="2" |Hash Algorithm
|Example: <code>TCP+UDP</code>
|AES 128
|Select the protocol  for the rule.
 
AES 192
 
'''AES 256'''


Options typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.
3DES
| colspan="2" |'''AES 256''': Encryption algorithm for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.
|-
|-
|3
| colspan="2" |26
|Source zone
| colspan="2" |Authentication Phase II
|Example: <code>SW_LAN</code>
|SHA1
|Select the source zone where the traffic is originating  from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN
 
|-
MD5
|4
 
|Source MAC address [optional]
SHA 256
|Example: <code>any</code>
 
|'''any''': Leave as <code>any</code> if you don't want to specify a MAC address.
SHA 384
 
'''SHA 512'''
| colspan="2" |'''SHA 512''': Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.
 
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.
|-
|-
|5
| colspan="2" |27
|Source IP address[optional]
| colspan="2" |PFS Group
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.
|MODP768(group1)
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.
|-
|6
|Source port
|Example: <code>80, 443</code>  (if matching traffic for web server ports)
|Specify the  source port or port range.
|-
|7
|Destination zone
|Example: <code>SW_LAN</code>
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.
|-
|8
|Destination IP address
|Leave blank if not needed.
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.
|-
|9
|Destination port
|Example: <code>80</code>  (if redirecting to a web server port)
|Specify the  destination port or port range.
|}
'''Traffic Rule:'''


"Traffic rules" refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.
MODP1024(group2)


To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.
MODP1536(group5)


[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Dashboard.png]]
'''MODP2048(group14)'''


EDIT:
MODP3072(group15)


[[File:Firewall Edit Options .png]]
MODP4096(group16)
{| class="wikitable"
| colspan="2" |'''MODP2048 (group14)''': Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.
 
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.
|}
Click on save and then update the page for changes to reflect.
 
'''Open VPN:'''
 
To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R OPEN VPN.png|1024x1024px]]The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”
 
Only the '''TAP''' connection needs a '''bridge'''. The tun connection does not require a bridge. Here we have established a '''TUN''' connection.
 
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R OPEN VPN CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]
 
VPN TUN has been established.
 
Same way VPN TAP can also be established with the help of bridging.
 
'''WireGuard:'''
 
'''WireGuard''' is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.
 
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R WIREGURD.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R WIREGURD CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Click on the save button after the required configuration.
 
Specifications details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field name
|Field name
|Sample value
|Sample value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Name
|Wireguard Role
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS
|Client/Server
|Field must not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select the wireguard role.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Restrict to Address Family
|WireGuard Tunnel Over
|IPV4/IPV6
|'''IPV4''': Use this if  your network and endpoint (WireGuard server) support only IPv4.


|1.        Options: IPv4, IPv6
'''IPV6''': Use this if  your network and endpoint support IPv6.
 
Example: IPv4 if  dealing with typical internet traffic.
|Select the address family to generate  iptables rules for.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Protocol
|Enable Failover
|Example: TCP+UDP
|Enable/Disable
|TCP+UDP: Match incoming traffic using the  given protocol.
|This option  allows the VPN connection to automatically switch to a backup connection if the primary connection fails.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Match ICMP Type
|Enable IPV4
|Example: any
|Enable/Disable
|Match all ICMP types if set to any.  Specific types can be chosen if needed.
|This enables IPv4  traffic to be routed through the WireGuard tunnel.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Source Zone
|Enable IPV6
|Example: LAN
|Enable/Disable
|Specifies the traffic source zone.
|Enable this if  your network and the destination support IPv6.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Enable DDoS  Prevention
|Listen Port
|Example:  ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention measures
|51820
|Enable or disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.
|This is the default port that WireGuard uses to listen for incoming connections.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Source MAC  Address
|Endpoint Host port
|Example: any
|51820
|any: Match traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.
|This is the port on the WireGuard server that the client will connect to.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Source Address
|Peer Publickey
|Example:  192.168.1.0/24
|*****
|Match incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.
|This is the public key of the WireGuard server that the client uses to establish a secure connection.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Source Port
|Enable Default  Route
|Example: any if  all source ports should be matched
|Enable/Disable
|any: Match incoming traffic from the specified  source port or port range.
|Enable this if you want all network traffic (not just specific routes) to be routed through the WireGuard VPN.
|-
|}
|10
Save and update the page after configuration has been done.
|Destination Zone
 
|Example: WAN
 
|Specifies the traffic destination zone.
 
|-
'''Zerotier:'''
|11
 
|Action
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.
|Example: ACCEPT
 
|Options: ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the  action to take for matched traffic.
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account.  
 
In ZeroTier Central, click on "Create a Network". This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.
 
Go to settings => VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Zerotier.png|1024x1024px]]
 
 
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R ZEROTIER ENABLING.png|1024x1024px]][[File:GRD44B 5R ZEROTIER CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]Click on the save button after the required configuration.
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field name
|Sample  value
|Description
|-
|-
|12
|1
|Limit
|NetworkID
|Example:  10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per minute.
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4
|Maximum average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second, /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste the unique 16-digit network id.
|-
|-
|13
|2
|Extra arguments
|Listen Port
|Example:  --log-prefix "Blocked: " to add a log prefix to log messages for  this rule.
|9993
|Passes additional arguments to iptables.  Use with care as it can significantly alter rule behaviour.
|Default
 
|}
|}
Click on save once configured.


'''SNAT Traffic Rule:'''


For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.
'''PPTP:'''
 
This configuration is for setting up a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunnelling Protocol) VPN connection.


To add new source NAT,
PPTP is a protocol that enables secure data transmission across public networks like the internet, often used to connect to remote networks or access resources securely.


Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”
''*Refer the image below*''


[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B-5R PPTP.png|1024x1024px]]


'''EDIT:'''
'''EDIT:'''


[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B-5R PPTP Config.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field name
|Field Name
|Sample value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Name
|PPTP Role
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN
|Client/Server
|'''Field must not be empty''': Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.
|'''Client:''' meaning it will initiate the connection to the remote PPTP server.
 
'''Server:'''  means this device will accept incoming PPTP connections from clients, which  can be users or devices that need remote access to the local network or  internet via this server.
|-
|
|
|
|
|-
| colspan="4" |'''PPTP Role: CLIENT'''
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Protocol
|Default  Route
|Example: TCP+UDP
|Enable/Disable
|'''TCP+UDP''': Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.
|Enabling the default route means that all network traffic will be routed through the VPN tunnel once the connection is established.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Source Zone
|Metric
|Example: wan
|Ex: 0
|'''wan''': Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.
|The metric is a value that defines the priority of this route among other  available routes. Lower metrics indicate higher priority.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Source IP Address
|Server  IP
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|'''-- please choose --''': Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule applies to any source IP.
|This is the IP address of the PPTP server the client will connect to.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Source Port
|Interface
|Example: any
|Any
|'''any''': Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.
 
EWAN5
|Selecting the correct interface is essential because it tells the system which network  adapter should be used to establish the VPN connection.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Destination Zone
|Username
|Example: lan
|******
|'''lan''': Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.
|This field is the login username for the PPTP server.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Destination IP Address
|Password
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100
|****
|'''-- please  choose --''': Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.
|This  is the password associated with the username.
|-
| colspan="4" |'''PPTP Role: SERVER'''
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Destination port
|Local  IP
|Example: any
|Ex: 192.168.0.1
|'''any''': Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.
|This  IP address (192.168.0.1) is the local IP of the PPTP server on its network. Clients connecting to the VPN will see this address as their gateway or endpoint within the VPN.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|SNAT IP Address
|Remote  IP Range
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)
|Ex: 192.168.0.20-30
|'''-- please choose --''': Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be translated.
|This range defines the pool of IP addresses that the server will assign to  connected VPN clients. Here, any client connecting to the server will receive  an IP address between 192.168.0.20 and 192.168.0.30, which provides up to 11 possible addresses for simultaneous connections.
|-
|-
|10
|10
|SNAT Port
|Username
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port like ‘12345’
|ExUser1
|Optionally, rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only rewrite the IP address.
|This is a username that the client will use to authenticate with the PPTP serverIn this case, User1 is designated as an authorized user.
|-
|-
|11
|11
|Extra Arguments
|Password
|Example: --log-prefix "SNAT_traffic: " (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)
|*****
|Pass additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.
|The password associated with User1 is required to complete the authentication.
|}
|}
Click on save once configured.
Once Configured, click on save and update.
 
'''Parental Control:'''
 
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and


destination zones, as well as specific devices.
'''L2TP:'''


To add parental control in firewall,
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol) is a network protocol used to establish secure tunnels for transferring data between remote devices or networks, often in VPNs, by encapsulating data for encryption and routing.


Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.
''*Refer the image below*''


[[File:Parental Control.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R L2TP.png|1024x1024px]]


'''EDIT:'''
'''EDIT:'''


[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R L2TP Config.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Name
|L2TP Role
|Example: Parental_Control_Sunday
|Client/Server
|'''Field must  not be empty''': Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental control rule.
|'''Client''': connecting to an L2TP server to  establish a secure tunnel for communication.
 
'''Server''': the  server listens for incoming client connections.
|-
| colspan="4" |'''L2TP Role: CLIENT'''
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Proto
|Default Route
|all
|Enable/Disable
|'''all''': This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.
|If enabled, all outbound traffic will be routed  through the L2TP connection.
 
If disabled, only specific traffic destined for the L2TP network will use the tunnel.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Source Zone
|Metric
|Example: lan
|Ex: 1
|'''Field must not be empty''': Please look at Firewall->Zone Settings to find zone names.
|The system uses this metric to decide which route to prioritize if multiple routes exist.
 
L2TP connection with Metric 1 will take precedence over a LAN or WAN route with Metric 10.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Destination Zone
|Server IP
|Example: wan
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|'''Field must not be empty''': Please look at Firewall->Zone Settings to find zone names.
|This is the '''IP address of the L2TP server''' to which the client will connect.
 
'''Local Networks''': If connecting  within a LAN, the server might have an IP like 192.168.x.x.
 
'''Remote Connections''': The server IP might be a public address like 203.0.113. x.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Source MAC Address
|Checkup  Interval Time (in sec)
|Example: 00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E
|Ex: 30/60 secs
|'''Field''': Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.
|Setting 30 seconds ensures the client checks the connection every half-minute. If the  tunnel drops, the client can quickly reconnect.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Target
|Interface
|Example: Reject
|Any
|'''Accept''': This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.
|Example interfaces might include eth0, usb0, or ra0.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Weekdays
|Username
|Example: Sunday
|Ex: User
|'''Sunday''': Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.
|The server verifies the username to grant or deny access.
 
Must match  credentials configured on the L2TP server.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Month Days
|Password
|Example: All
|******
|'''All:''' Specify the days of the month when the rule should be active.
|Should be kept secure and match the configuration on the server.
 
Masked for  privacy during configuration.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)
|MPPE Encryption
|Example: 18:00:00 (6:00 PM)
|Enable/Disable
|'''Field must  not be empty:''' Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.
|'''Enabled''': Encrypts  traffic using MPPE, enhancing security (recommended).
 
'''Disabled''': Transmits  data unencrypted, reducing overhead but exposing traffic to potential risks.
|-
| colspan="4" |'''L2TP Role: SERVER'''
|-
|-
|10
|10
|Stop Time (hh:mm:ss)
|Local IP
|Example: 22:00:00 (10:00 PM)
|Ex: 192.168.0.1
|'''Field must not be empty:''' Specify the stop time when the rule should end.
|This is the '''local IP address of the L2TP server'''. It serves as the gateway for clients  connected via the L2TP tunnel.
|}
|-
'''Zone Forwarding:'''
|11
|Start
|Ex: 192.168.0.20
|Specifies the first IP address that can be assigned to connected clients.
|-
|12
|Limit
|Ex: 192.168.0.30
|Creates an IP  pool for clients (from 192.168.0.20 to 192.168.0.30 in this case).
|-
|13
|Username
|Ex: User1
|Ensures that  only authorized users can connect.


Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.
The server  verifies this username against its authentication database.
|-
|14
|Password
|******
|The server  verifies the password along with the username.
 
The password  must match the one configured on the server for successful authentication.
|}


To ADD new zone,
=== 2.6 Firewall ===
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet.


Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.
Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device.


[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|1024x1024px]]
Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.


'''EDIT:'''
To configure a Firewall, navigate to settings <= firewall,


[[File:Parental Control Zone Configuration.png|975x975px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Firewall overview.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are below:
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Source Zone
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.
|'''--please  choose--''': Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.
|-
|2
|Destination Zone
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.
|'''--please  choose--''': Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.
|}


=== 2.6 Loopback Rule ===
* General Settings
In this page the user can configure the port where he wants to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different ports as per the requirement.
* Port forwards
* Traffic Rules
* SNAT traffic Rules
* Parental Control
* Zone Forwarding


[[File:Parental Control Zone Loopback Rule.png|975x975px]]
'''General Settings:'''


The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,


'''EDIT:'''
1.) General settings


[[File:Parental Control Zone Loopback Rule 1.png]]
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.


Specification details are given below:
[[File:GRD44B 5R Firewall general settings.png|1024x1024px]]
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|'''SN'''
|Field Name
|'''Field Name'''
|Sample Value
|'''Sample Value'''
|Description
|'''Description'''
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Name
|Enable SYN-flood protection
|Example: loopback
|Enabled
|Provide a descriptive name for the rule.
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Protocol
|Disable IPV6
|Example: TCP+UDP
|Disabled
|'''TCP+UDP''': Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Source IP Address [Optional]
|Drop invalid packets
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24
|Disabled
|Optionally specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Source Port [Optional]
|TCP SYN Cookies
|Example: any
|Disabled
|'''any''': Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any allows  traffic from all ports.
|This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Loopback IP Address
|Input
|Example: 127.0.0.1
|Reject/Accept
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.
|By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Port
|Output
|Example: any
|Reject/Accept
|'''any''':  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed. any allows traffic to all ports.
|By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Action
|Forward
|Example: DNAT
|Reject/Accept
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.
|By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
|-
|8
|Internal IP Address
|Example: 192.168.1.100
|'''Field must not be empty''': Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.
|-
|9
|Internal Port
|Example: any
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.
|}
|}
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.


=== 2.7 Remote Monitoring ===
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.


Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.


[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|1024x1024px]]
'''2.) Zone settings'''


'''NMS:'''
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.


IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.
[[File:GRD44B 5R Zone settings.png|1024x1024px]]


Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).


[[File:Remote Management System NMS Configuration.png]]
'''Port Forwards:'''


Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.


'''TR_069:'''
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.


To enable the TR_069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.  


[[File:TR 069.png]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R Port forwards.png|1024x1024px]]


Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.
'''EDIT:'''


[[File:GRD44B 5R Port forwards edit.png|1024x1024px]]


[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
Click on the save button after the required configuration.
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field name
|Sample Value
|Sample value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Serving  Interval
|Name
|300
|Example: <code>Web_Server_Forward</code>
|A value of 300 seconds means the device will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.
|Field must not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Interface
|Protocol
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.
|Example: <code>TCP+UDP</code>
|This specifies the network interface used for TR-069 communication.
|Select the  protocol for the rule.
 
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Username
|Source zone
|Example: User
|Example: <code>SW_LAN</code>
|The username used to authenticate with the ACS.
|Select the source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Password
|Source MAC address [optional]
|••••
|Example: <code>any</code>
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.
|'''any''': Leave as <code>any</code> if you don't want to specify a MAC address.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|URL
|Source IP address[optional]
|<nowiki>http://example.com</nowiki>
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the CPE  (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.
|}
|-
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.
|6
 
|Source port
=== 2.8 Tunnel ===
|Example: <code>80, 443</code> (if matching traffic for web server ports)
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.
|Specify the source port or port range.
 
|-
It is further categorised into 3 sections,
|7
 
|Destination zone
1.) General Settings
|Example: <code>SW_LAN</code>
 
|Select the destination zone where the traffic is heading to.
2.) GRE Tunnel
|-
 
|8
3.) IPIP Tunnel
|Destination IP address
|Leave blank if not needed.
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.
|-
|9
|Destination port
|Example: <code>80</code>  (if redirecting to a web server port)
|Specify the  destination port or port range.
|}


[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|1024x1024px]]
'''Traffic Rule:'''


"Traffic rules" refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.


'''General Settings:'''
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.  
 
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.
 
[[File:Tunnel General Settings 1.png|975x975px]]
 
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click on the save button.
 
'''GRE Tunnel:'''
 
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.
 
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.
 
[[File:GRE Dashboard.png|975x975px]]


Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.
[[File:GRD44B 5R TRAFFIC RULES.png|1024x1024px]]


'''EDIT:'''
'''EDIT:'''


[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|1024x1024px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R TRAFFIC RULES EDIT.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field name
|Sample Value
|Sample value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Tunnel  name
|Name
|Example:  GRETunnel
|Example:  Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS
|'''GRETunnel''': The name of the GRE tunnel.
|Field must not be empty: Provide a  descriptive name for the traffic rule.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Local external IP
|Restrict to Address Family
|Example:  10.1.1.66
 
|The IP address of the local endpoint that will initiate the GRE tunnel.
|1.      Options: IPv4, IPv6
 
Example: IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.
|Select the address family to generate iptables rules for.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Remote external  IP
|Protocol
|Example: 10.1.1.40
|Example: TCP+UDP
|The IP address of the remote endpoint that will terminate the GRE tunnel.
|TCP+UDP: Match incoming traffic using the  given protocol.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Peer  tunnel IP
|Match ICMP Type
|Example: 10.1.1.4
|Example: any
|The IP address of the peer's tunnel interface.
|Match all ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Local  tunnel IP
|Source Zone
|Example: 10.1.1.6
|Example: LAN
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.
|Specifies the traffic source zone.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Local tunnel net mask
|Enable DDoS Prevention
|Example:  255.255.255.0
|Example:  ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention measures
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel interface.
|Enable or disable Distributed Denial of  Service (DDoS) prevention.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Remote IP
|Source MAC  Address
|Example: 192.168.10.0/24
|Example: any
|The remote network that is reachable through the GRE tunnel.
|any: Match traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Enable  Tunnel Link
|Source Address
|Check to enable
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.
|Match incoming traffic from the specified  source IP address or range.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Interface  type
|Source Port
|Example:  EWAN2
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched
|'''EWAN2''': The type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.
|any: Match incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.
|-
|-
|10
|10
|MTU
|Destination Zone
|Example: 1476
|Example: WAN
|'''1476''': Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.
|Specifies the traffic destination zone.
|-
|-
|11
|11
|TTL
|Action
|Example: 64
|Example: ACCEPT
|'''64''': Time To Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.
|Options: ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.
|-
|-
|12
|12
|Tunnel  key
|Limit
|Example:  12345678
|Example:  10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per minute.
|'''12345678''': A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.
|Maximum average matching rate; specified  as a number, with an optional /second, /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.
|-
|-
|13
|13
|Enable  keep alive
|Extra arguments
|Check to enable
|Example: --log-prefix "Blocked: " to add a log prefix to log messages for this rule.
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel's status.
|Passes additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter rule behaviour.
|-
|14
|Keep  alive interval
|Example10
|'''10''': Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.
|}
|}
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.
Click on save once configured.  
 
'''SNAT Traffic Rule:'''


'''IPIP Tunnel:'''
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.


An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunnelling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. This is like GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.
To add new source NAT,


Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”


[[File:Ipip config.png|624x624px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R SNAT TRAFFIC RULES.png|1024x1024px]]


'''EDIT:'''
'''EDIT:'''


[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|624x624px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R SNAT TRAFFIC RULES CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]


Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.


 
Specification details are below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field name
|Sample Value
|Sample value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Tunnel  name
|Name
|Example: IPIPTunnel
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN
|'''IPIPTunnel:''' The name of the IPIP tunnel.
|'''Field must  not be empty''': Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Local  external IP
|Protocol
|Example: 10.1.1.66
|Example: TCP+UDP
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.
|'''TCP+UDP''':  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Remote  external IP
|Source Zone
|Example: 10.1.1.40
|Example: wan
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.
|'''wan''': Specifies  the source zone from which the traffic originates.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Peer  tunnel IP
|Source IP Address
|Example: 10.1.1.4
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24
|The IP address of the peer's tunnel interface.
|'''-- please  choose --''': Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.
|-
|
|
|
|
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Local  tunnel IP
|Source Port
|Example: 10.1.1.6
|Example: any
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.
|'''any''':  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Local  tunnel net mask
|Destination Zone
|Example: 255.255.255.0
|Example: lan
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.
|'''lan''':  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Remote IP
|Destination IP Address
|Example: 192.168.10.0/24
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100
|The remote network that is reachable through the IPIP tunnel.
|'''-- please  choose --''': Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule applies to any destination IP.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Enable  Tunnel Link
|Destination port
|Check to  enable
|Example: any
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.
|'''any''':  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Interface  type
|SNAT IP Address
|Example: EWAN2
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)
|'''EWAN2''': The type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.
|'''-- please  choose --''': Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be translated.
|-
|-
|10
|10
|MTU
|SNAT Port
|Example:  1476
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port like ‘12345’
|'''1476''': Maximum Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only rewrite the IP address.
|-
|-
|11
|11
|TTL
|Extra Arguments
|Example: 64
|Example: --log-prefix "SNAT_traffic: " (to add a log prefix to log messages for this rule)
|'''64''': Time To Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.
|Pass additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter rule behaviour.
|-
|}
|12
Click on save once configured.
|Tunnel  key
 
|Example:  12345678
'''Parental Control:'''
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.
 
|-
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and
|13
 
|Enable keep alive
destination zones, as well as specific devices.
|Check to  enable
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel's status.
|-
|14
|Keep  alive interval
|Example:  10
|'''10''':  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.
|}


= 3.Maintenance =
To add parental control in firewall,
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password,


firmware and monitoring.
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.  


It includes 6 submodules.
[[File:GRD44B 5R PARENTAL CONTROL.png|1024x1024px]]


* General
'''EDIT:'''
* Password
* Reboot
* Import and Export config
* Firmware upgrade
* Monitor Application


[[File:Maintenance System.png|623x623px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R PARENTAL CONTROL CONFIG.png|1024x1024px]]


=== 3.1 General ===
Specification details are given below:
Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.
 
It is further sub-divided into,
 
1.) General Settings
 
2.) Logging
 
3.) Language and Style
 
 
'''General Settings:'''
 
[[File:Maintenance General.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Local  Time
|Name
|2024/07/30  13:25:47
|Example: Parental_Control_Sunday
|The current local date and time set on the device.
|'''Field must  not be empty''': Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental control rule.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Hostname
|Proto
|22B25240007
|all
|The hostname of the device, which is  used to identify it on the network.
|'''all''':  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Timezone
|Source Zone
|Asia/Kolkata
|Example: lan
|The timezone setting of the device,  which determines the local time.
|'''Field must  not be empty''': Please look at Firewall->Zone Settings to find zone  names.
|}
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details. 
 
'''Logging:'''
 
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.
 
The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log verbosity levels.
 
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|4
|System log buffer size
|Destination Zone
|Example: 32 kiB
|Example: wan
|The size of the memory buffer allocated (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or sent to an external server.
|'''Field must not be empty''': Please look at Firewall->Zone Settings to find zone names.
|-
|-
|2
|5
|External system log server
|Source MAC Address
|Example: 0.0.0.0
|Example: 00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E
|The IP address of an external server  where logs can be sent.
|'''Field''':  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.
|-
|6
|Target
|Example: Reject
|'''Accept''':  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.
|-
|7
|Weekdays
|Example: Sunday
|'''Sunday''':  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.
|-
|-
|3
|8
|External system log server port
|Month Days
|Example: 514
|Example: All
|The port used to send logs to the external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.
|'''All:''' Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.
|-
|-
|4
|9
|Log output level
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)
|Example: Debug
|Example: 18:00:00 (6:00 PM)
|Sets the detail level of the system  logs.
|'''Field must  not be empty:''' Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.
|-
|-
|5
|10
|Cron Log level
|Stop Time (hh:mm:ss)
|Example: Debug
|Example: 22:00:00 (10:00 PM)
|The detail level of the logs for cron  jobs.
|'''Field must  not be empty:''' Specify the stop time when the rule should end.
|}
|}
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.  
Click on save once configured.


'''Language and Style:'''


Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.


Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.
'''Zone Forwarding:'''


[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|1024x1024px]]
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.


=== 3.2 Password ===
To ADD new zone,
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.


Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enters a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.


[[File:Admin Password Setup.png]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R ZONE FORWARDING.png|1024x1024px]]'''EDIT:'''


=== 3.3 Reboot ===
[[File:GRD44B 5R ZONE FORWADING EDIT.png|1024x1024px]]
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.


First option is to directly reboot the device without enabling the maintenance reboot tab.
Specification details are below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Source Zone
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.
|'''--please  choose--''': Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.
|-
|2
|Destination Zone
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.
|'''--please  choose--''': Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.
|}
Click on save once configured.


Click on “Reboot Now” at the bottom of the screen to start the reboot process.
=== 2.7 Loopback Rule ===
In this page the user can configure the port where he wants to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different ports as per the requirement.


[[File:Reboot Dashboard enable.png]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R LOOPBACK RULE.png|1024x1024px]]


To start maintenance reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.


Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|620x620px]]


[[File:GRD44B 5R LOOPBACK RULE edit.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Enable  Maintenance Reboot
|Name
|Enable/Disable
|Example: loopback
|Indicates whether the maintenance  reboot feature is enabled or not.
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Type
|Protocol
|Maintenance  Reboot
|Example: TCP+UDP
|Specifies the type of reboot being  scheduled.
|'''TCP+UDP''':  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Reboot  Type
|Source IP Address [Optional]
|Software/Hardware
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24
|'''Hardware''': A hardware reboot involves restarting the entire device as if it were powered off and on again.
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply to any source IP.
 
'''Software''': A software reboot involves restarting the  operating system without powering off the hardware.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Minutes
|Source Port [Optional]
|Example: 59
|Example: any
|The minute at which the reboot should occur (0-59).
|'''any''':  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any allows traffic from all ports.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Hours
|Loopback IP Address
|Example: 22 (10 PM)
|Example: 127.0.0.1
|The hour at which the reboot should occur (0-23, in 24-hour format).
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Day Of  Month
|Port
|Example: All
|Example: any
|Specifies which days of the month the  reboot should occur (1-31). "All" means it will occur every day.
|'''any''':  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed. any allows traffic to all ports.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Month
|Action
|Example: All
|Example: DNAT
|Specifies which months the reboot  should occur (1-12). "All" means it will occur every month.
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Day Of  Week
|Internal IP Address
|Example: All
|Example: 192.168.1.100
|Specifies which days of the week the  reboot should occur (0-6, where 0 is Sunday). "All" means it will occur every day of the week.
|'''Field must  not be empty''': Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should be redirected.
|-
|9
|Internal Port
|Example: any
|Redirect matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.
|}
|}
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.


=== 3.4 Import and Export ===
=== 2.8 VRRP ===
In this section, User can Import & Export Configuration files of the Device.
'''VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)''' is used to ensure high availability for IP routing by allowing multiple routers to work together to present the illusion of a single virtual router to the hosts on a network.


[[File:Import and Export Options.png|frameless|601x601px]]
In General Settings, click on ‘Enable VRRP’ and save.


Click “Export Config” to export device configuration & settings to a text file,
[[File:GRD44B 5R VRRP CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]


Click “Import Config” to import device configuration & settings from a previously exported text file.
In VRRP section,


[[File:Import window.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Give a name and ‘Add’ device.


The user needs to select on the “choose file”, upload the required file and click on apply.
Click on ‘Edit’ to make changes.


=== 3.5 Firmware Upgrade ===
Click on ‘Delete’ if particular instance not required.
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware.  


[[File:Firmware Upgrade .png|frameless|620x620px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R VRRP CONFIGURATION EDIT.png|1024x1024px]]


Click on the '''flash image''' and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.
'''EDIT:'''


This option will completely reset the device to default settings.
[[File:GRD44B 5R VRRP CONFIGURATION EDITING.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Role
|1.      Master


[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|620x620px]]
2.      Backup
|Choose '''Master'''  for the primary router that should handle the traffic under normal  circumstances.


Click on the '''Retain Config and flash''' and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.
Choose '''Backup''' for a secondary router that will take over if the master fails.
|-
|2
|Virtual ID
|Ex: 0
|The value can  range from 0 to 255.


This refers to updating the firmware (flashing) of a device while preserving the current configuration settings.
Ensure all  routers in the same VRRP group share the same '''Virtual ID'''.
|-
|3
|Priority
|Ex: 100
|For the '''Master'''  role, use the highest priority, typically above 100.


[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|620x620px]]
For the '''Backup'''  role, set a lower priority number, usually below the master's priority.
 
|-
Click on the '''Factory Reset''' for the complete retest of the device.
|4
|Interface
|SW_LAN
|This is the  network interface on which VRRP operates.
|-
|5
|Source IP
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|This is the  IP address used as the source in VRRP advertisements.
|-
|6
|Peer IP
|Ex: 192.168.10.10
|This is the  IP address of the other VRRP peer (usually the backup router). It helps the  routers identify each other.
|-
|7
|Virtual IP  Address
|192.168.10.100/24
|The virtual  IP should be an unused address within the subnet, such as 192.168.10.100/24,  ensuring it's consistent across all VRRP routers.
|-
|8
|Enable  Authentication
|Enable/Disable
|Enable this  if you want to secure your VRRP communications.
|-
|9
|Password
|*********
|It ensures  that only routers with the correct password can join the VRRP group.
|}
Save and update once changes have been made.
 
=== 2.9 Remote Monitoring ===
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.


[[File:Factory Reset.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.  


=== 3.6 Monitor Application ===
[[File:GRD44B 5R REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.png|1024x1024px]]
In this section, the monitor application is divided into major 2 configurations which is further sub-divided into 4 editable options,
 
'''NMS:'''


1.) Modem Monitor Application Configuration:
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.


2.) Router Monitor Application Configuration:
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).  


[[File:Monitor Application Dashboard.png|frameless|620x620px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R NMS.png|1024x1024px]]


'''TR_069:'''


'''Modem Monitor Application Configuration:'''
To enable the TR_069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.


[[File:Modem Monitor Application Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
[[File:TR_069.png]]Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.


Specification details are given below:
[[File:GRD44B 5R TR 069 EDITING.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Enable Ping Check Application
|Serving  Interval
|Enable/Disable
|300
|Turns on the functionality to perform ping checks on specified IP addresses.
|A value of 300 seconds means the device will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Time Interval for Check (In minutes)
|Interface
|'''Example:''' 10 minutes
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.
|Frequency at which the ping checks are performed.
|This specifies the network interface used for TR-069 communication.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Select No of IP addresses to ping
|Username
|'''Example:''' 1
|Example: User
|Number of IP addresses that will be pinged.
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|IP Address 1
|Password
|'''Example:''' 8.8.8.8
|••••
|The IP address to ping.
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|No. of Retries
|URL
|'''Example:''' 5
|<nowiki>http://example.com</nowiki>
|Number of times to retry pinging an IP address  if the initial ping fails.
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will receive configurations and updates from.
|-
|6
|Failure Criteria in (%)
|'''Example:''' 80% (If 4 out of 5 pings fail, it’s considered  a failure)
|Percentage of failed pings required to consider  the ping check a failure.
|-
|7
|Action On Failure
|'''Example:''' Restart Modem
|Action to be taken if the ping check fails according to the criteria.
|-
|8
|Enable Second Level Action
|Enable/Disable
|Option to enable a secondary action if the  primary action fails multiple times.
|-
|9
|Second Level Action Threshold
|'''Example:''' 2
|Number of failures required to trigger the  secondary action.
|-
|10
|Second Level Action
|'''Example:''' Restart Board (Reboots  the entire hardware board)
|The action to be taken if the second level action threshold is met.
|}
|}
Save the details once made necessary changes.


'''Router Monitor Application Configuration:'''


[[File:Router Monitor Application Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.
 
=== 2.10 Tunnel ===
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.
 
It is further categorised into 3 sections,
 
1.) General Settings
 
2.) GRE Tunnel
 
3.) IPIP Tunnel 
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R TUNNEL CONFIGURATION .png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''General Settings:'''
 
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R TUNNEL GENERAL CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click on the save button.
 
 
 
 
'''GRE Tunnel:'''
 
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.
 
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R GRE TUNNEL.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.
 
 
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R GRE TUNNEL CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Enable Ping Check Application
|Tunnel  name
|Enable/Disable
|Example:  GRETunnel
|Activates the ping check functionality to monitor router performance.
|'''GRETunnel''': The name of the GRE tunnel.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Time Interval for Check (In minutes)
|Local  external IP
|'''Example:''' 10 minutes
|Example: 10.1.1.66
|How frequently the ping checks are performed.
|The IP address of the local endpoint that will initiate the GRE tunnel.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Select No of IP Addresses to Ping
|Remote external  IP
|'''Example:''' 1 (Please select the appropriate number  based on your requirements)
|Example: 10.1.1.40
|Choose the  number of IP addresses to ping. This typically involves selecting from a list  or entering multiple addresses.
|The IP address of the remote endpoint that will terminate the GRE tunnel.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|No. of Retries
|Peer  tunnel IP
|'''Example:''' 3
|Example: 10.1.1.4
|Number of  retries if a ping fails.
|The IP address of the peer's tunnel interface.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Failure Criteria in (%)
|Local  tunnel IP
|'''Example:''' 80% (If 80% of the pings fail, it’s deemed a failure)
|Example:  10.1.1.6
|Percentage of  failed pings required to consider the ping check as failed.
|The IP address of the local tunnel interface.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Action On Failure
|Local  tunnel net mask
|'''Example:''' Restart IPsec
|Example: 255.255.255.0
|The action taken if the ping check fails according to the criteria.
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel interface.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Enable Second Level Action
|Remote IP
|Enable/Disable
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24
|Option to enable an additional action if the primary action fails.
|The remote network that is reachable through the GRE tunnel.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Second Level Action Threshold
|Enable  Tunnel Link
|'''Example:''' Specify the number of failures, such as 2
|Check to  enable
|Number of  times the primary action must fail before the secondary action is triggered.
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Second Level Action
|Interface  type
|'''Example:''' Restart Board
|Example:  EWAN2
|The action to  be taken if the second level action threshold is met.
|'''EWAN2''': The  type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.
|-
|10
|MTU
|Example: 1476
|'''1476''': Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.
|-
|11
|TTL
|Example:  64
|'''64''': Time To  Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.
|-
|12
|Tunnel  key
|Example:  12345678
|'''12345678''': A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.
|-
|13
|Enable  keep alive
|Check to  enable
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel's status.
|-
|14
|Keep  alive interval
|Example:  10
|'''10''': Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.
|}
|}
Save the details once made necessary changes.
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.  
 


= 4.Status =
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.


It has 4 submodules.
'''IPIP Tunnel:'''


* Interfaces
An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunnelling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. This is like GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.
* Internet
* Modem
* Routes


[[File:Status Dashboard.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.


=== 4.1 Interfaces ===
[[File:GRD44B 5R IPIP TUNNEL CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]
Each network device (interface) is associated with specific traffic statistics, uptime, and status. Active interfaces are operational, while inactive interfaces are not currently transmitting data.


[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|620x620px]]


Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular, wifi, ewan, vpn etc is up.
'''EDIT:'''


=== 4.2 Internet ===
[[File:GRD44B 5R IPIP TUNNEL EDIT.png|1024x1024px]]Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.


[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Specification details are given below:
 
{| class="wikitable"
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.
|SN
 
|Field Name
=== 4.3 Modem ===
|Sample Value
This modem status page provides comprehensive information about the cellular connection's network operator, technology, mode, and various signal quality metrics.
|Description
 
|-
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]
|1
 
|Tunnel  name
=== 4.4 Routes ===
|Example:  IPIPTunnel
This configuration shows how the router directs traffic between different networks and interfaces, ensuring proper communication within the local network and to external networks via the default gateway.
|'''IPIPTunnel:''' The name of the IPIP tunnel.
 
|-
'''ARP Table:''' Maps IP addresses to MAC addresses for devices on the network, helping in identifying which device is on which interface.
|2
 
|Local external  IP
'''IPv4 Routes:''' This shows which network is directly connected on which interface.
|Example: 10.1.1.66
 
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.
Example: Network '''192.168.10.0/24''' is directly connected on interface '''eth0.1.'''
|-
 
|3
'''IPv6 Routes:''' Similar routes as IPv4, but this time listed under IPv6 routing rules.
|Remote  external IP
 
|Example: 10.1.1.40
Example: Local networks '''192.168.10.0/24''' and '''192.168.100.0/24''' are managed through '''eth0.1''' and '''ra0''', respectively.
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.
 
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
= 5. Features =
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.
 
This module includes 7 features.
 
* Mac Address Binding
* URL Filtering
* Web Server
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering
* Routing
* Others
* Connection Diagnostics
 
[[File:Features Dashboard.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
=== 5.1 Mac Address Binding ===
MAC address binding is a configuration that binds a specific MAC address to a specific IP address. This ensures that a particular device on the network always receives the same IP address from the DHCP server, which can be useful for network management, security, and ensuring consistent network behaviour.
 
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC.
 
You can edit the pre-existing configuration, or you can ‘Add’ in the ‘New MAC ADDRESS’ field.
 
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|4
|Device Name
|Peer  tunnel IP
|Macbinding1
|Example:  10.1.1.4
|A user-defined name for the binding configuration.
|The IP address of the peer's tunnel interface.
|-
|-
|2
|5
|MAC Address
|Local  tunnel IP
|48:9e:bd:da:45:91
|Example: 10.1.1.6
|The unique identifier for the network interface of the device to which the IP address will be bound.
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.
|-
|6
|Local  tunnel net mask
|Example: 255.255.255.0
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.
|-
|7
|Remote IP
|Example: 192.168.10.0/24
|The remote network that is reachable through the IPIP tunnel.
|-
|8
|Enable  Tunnel Link
|Check to enable
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.
|-
|-
|3
|9
|IP Address
|Interface  type
|192.168.10.55
|Example:  EWAN2
|The IP address that will be consistently assigned to the device with the specified MAC address.
|'''EWAN2''': The  type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.
|}
|-
 
|10
 
|MTU
By applying this configuration, the DHCP server will always assign the IP address 192.168.10.55 to the device with the MAC address 48:9e:bd:da:45:91, ensuring consistency and stability in network addressing for that device.
|Example: 1476
 
|'''1476''': Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.
* Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.
|-
* The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.
|11
 
|TTL
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.
|Example:  64
 
|'''64''': Time To  Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.
=== 5.2 URL Filtering ===
|-
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device. By implementing URL filtering with the specified URL, you can control and restrict access to certain websites, thereby improving network security and managing user access.
|12
 
|Tunnel  key
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|620x620px]]
|Example:  12345678
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.
|-
|13
|Enable  keep alive
|Check to  enable
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel's status.
|-
|14
|Keep  alive interval
|Example:  10
|'''10''': Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.
|}


To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.
== 3.Maintenance ==
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password,


Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save.
firmware and monitoring.


The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.
It includes 6 submodules.


[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|620x620px]]
* General
* Password
* Reboot
* Import and Export config
* Firmware upgrade
* Monitor Application


To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.
[[File:GRD44B 5R MAINTENANCE.png|1024x1024px]]


Click on “save” after the changes are done as per the need.
''*Below is the detailed explanation of every field*''
 
=== 3.1 General ===
Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.
 
It is further sub-divided into,
 
1.) General Settings
 
2.) Logging
 
3.) Language and Style


=== 5.3 Web Server ===
This configuration will allow your device to serve web traffic securely over HTTPS, keep its system time synchronized, and ensure that all HTTP traffic is redirected to HTTPS for better security.


[[File:Web server.png|frameless|620x620px]]


'''EDIT:'''
'''General Settings:'''


[[File:Webserver Configuration Editing.png|frameless|620x620px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R SYS PROPS.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
'''EDIT:'''
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field Name
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Sample Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Enable HTTP
|Local Time
|'''HTTP Port:''' 80
|2024/07/30  13:25:47
 
|The current local date and time set on  the device.
Enable or disable the HTTP server.
|Port 80 is the default port for HTTP traffic.  It is used to serve web pages over an unencrypted connection.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Enable HTTPS
|Hostname
|'''HTTPS Port:''' 443
|22B25240007
 
|The hostname of the device, which is  used to identify it on the network.
Enable or disable the HTTPS server.
|Port 443 is the default port for HTTPS traffic. It is used to serve web pages over an encrypted connection.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Redirect HTTPS
|Timezone
|Option to redirect HTTP traffic to  HTTPS.
|Asia/Kolkata
|When enabled, all HTTP requests will be automatically redirected to the HTTPS port to ensure secure communication.
|The timezone setting of the devicewhich determines the local time.
|-
|}
|4
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.
|Enable NTP Sync
|Enable or disable NTP synchronization.
|Synchronizes the device’s system clock with an  external NTP server to maintain accurate time.
|-
|5
|NTP Server
|0.openwrt.pool.ntp.org
|The address of the NTP server used for time  synchronization. The openwrt.pool.ntp.org server is a public NTP server pool.
|-
|6
|NTP Sync Interval (In Minutes)
|15
|The interval at which the device will sync its  clock with the NTP server, set to every 15 minutes in this case.
|}


'''Logging:'''


Click on save once changes are made.
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.


=== 5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering ===
The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log verbosity levels.
Wireless MAC ID Filtering allows you to control which devices can connect to your wireless network based on their MAC (Media Access Control) addresses. This can help enhance security by allowing only specified devices to access the network.


It is further divided into 2 categories,
[[File:GRD44B 5R LOGGING .png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Description
|-
|1
|System log buffer size
|Example: 32 kiB
|The size of the memory buffer allocated  (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or  sent to an external server.
|-
|2
|External system log server
|Example: 0.0.0.0
|The IP address of an external server  where logs can be sent.
|-
|3
|External system log server port
|Example: 514
|The port used to send logs to the  external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.
|-
|4
|Log output level
|Example: Debug
|Sets the detail level of the system  logs.
|-
|5
|Cron Log level
|Example: Debug
|The detail level of the logs for cron  jobs.
|}
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.


'''WIFI 2.4G AP'''
'''WIFI 2.4G AP Guest'''
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering .png|frameless|620x620px]]
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.
In ‘Change Mode’ select one option,


'''Blacklist'''


In blacklist mode, you specify which MAC addresses are not allowed to connect to the wireless network. Devices not on the blacklist will be able to connect.
'''Language and Style:'''
 
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.
 
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.


'''Whitelist'''
[[File:GRD44B 5R LANGUAGE AND STYLE.png|1024x1024px]]


In whitelist mode, you specify which MAC addresses are allowed to connect to the wireless network. Devices not on the whitelist will be blocked.
=== 3.2 Password ===
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.


To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option.
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enters a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.  


[[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|620x620px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R PASSWORD UPDATE.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
=== 3.3 Reboot ===
{| class="wikitable"
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Status
|Enable/Disable
|Enable or disable the MAC ID filtering.
|-
|2
|MAC ID
|Example: e8:6f:38:1a:f2:61
|The MAC address of the device to be whitelisted  or blocklisted.
|-
|3
|Network Name
|Example: WIFI 2.4G AP or Wi-Fi 2.4G AP  Guest.
|The network to apply the MAC ID filtering.
|}
Once the required MAC ID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.


The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.
First option is to directly reboot the device without enabling the maintenance reboot tab.


Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.
Click on “Reboot Now” at the bottom of the screen to start the reboot process.


=== 5.5 Routing ===
[[File:GRD44B 5R MAINTENANCE REBOOT .png|1024x1024px]]
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device like Target address, Networks address etc. Routing configurations allow network packets to be directed between different subnets and networks.


It is further divided into 2 sections,


'''Static IPV4 Routes'''


'''Advanced Static IPV4 Routes'''
To start maintenance reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.


'''Static IPV4 Routes:'''
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.


Click on ‘Add’ to add a new interface.
[[File:GRD44B 5R MAINTENANCE REBOOT EDIT.png|1024x1024px]]


[[File:Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Specification details are given below:


 
{| class="wikitable"
'''EDIT:'''
|SN
 
|Field Name
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.
|Sample Value
 
|Description
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.
 
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.
 
[[File:Static IPV4 Routes Editing.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field Name
|Sample Value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Interface
|Enable  Maintenance Reboot
|Ex: eth0.1
|Enable/Disable
|The network interface to be used for this route. Select the one to use from dropdown.
|Indicates whether the maintenance reboot feature is enabled or not.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Target
|Type
|Ex: 192.168.20.0
|Maintenance  Reboot
|The destination subnet to which traffic should be routed.
|Specifies the type of reboot being scheduled.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|IPv4 Netmask
|Reboot  Type
|255.255.255.0
|Software/Hardware
|The subnet mask for the target network.
|'''Hardware''': A hardware reboot involves restarting the  entire device as if it were powered off and on again.
 
'''Software''': A software reboot involves restarting the  operating system without powering off the hardware.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Metric
|Minutes
|0
|Example:  59
|The priority of the route.
|The minute at which the reboot should  occur (0-59).
 
Lower values indicate higher priority.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|IPv4 Gateway
|Hours
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|Example: 22 (10 PM)
|The gateway IP address to be used for routing traffic to the target subnet.
|The hour at which the reboot should occur (0-23, in 24-hour format).
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Route Type
|Day Of  Month
|Unicast
|Example:  All
|Standard route for individual destination IP addresses.
|Specifies which days of the month the  reboot should occur (1-31). "All" means it will occur every day.
|-
|7
|Month
|Example: All
|Specifies which months the reboot  should occur (1-12). "All" means it will occur every month.
|-
|8
|Day Of  Week
|Example:  All
|Specifies which days of the week the  reboot should occur (0-6, where 0 is Sunday). "All" means it will  occur every day of the week.
|}


Custom changes can be made.
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.


'''Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:'''
=== 3.4 Import and Export ===
In this section, User can Import & Export Configuration files of the Device.
[[File:GRD44B 5R IMPORT EXPORT CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]


Click on ‘Add’ to add a new interface.
Click “Export Config” to export device configuration & settings to a text file,


[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Click “Import Config” to import device configuration & settings from a previously exported text file.


'''EDIT:'''
[[File:GRD44B 5R IMPORT EXPORT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD.png|1024x1024px]]


To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.
The user needs to select on the “choose file”, upload the required file and click on apply.


Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.
=== 3.5 Firmware Upgrade ===
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware.


Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.
[[File:GRD44B 5R FIRMWARE UPGRADE.png|1024x1024px]]


[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes Editing.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Click on the '''flash image''' and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.


Specification details are given below:
This option will completely reset the device to default settings.
{| class="wikitable"
 
|SN
[[File:GRD44B 5R FLASH IMAGE.png|1024x1024px]]Click on the '''Retain Config and flash''' and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.
 
This refers to updating the firmware (flashing) of a device while preserving the current configuration settings.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R RETAIN CONFIG AND FLASH.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Click on the '''Factory Reset''' for the complete retest of the device.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R FACTORY RESET.png|1024x1024px]]
 
=== 3.6 Monitor Application ===
In this section, the monitor application is divided into major 2 configurations which is further sub-divided into 4 editable options,
 
1.) Modem Monitor Application Configuration:
 
2.) Router Monitor Application Configuration:
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R MONITOR APP.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''Modem Monitor Application Configuration:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R MODEM MONITOR APP.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Sample  Value
Line 2,765: Line 3,029:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Interface
|Enable Ping Check Application
|Ex: ra0
|Enable/Disable
|The network interface through which the traffic will be routed. Select as per requirement.
|Turns on the functionality to perform ping checks on specified IP addresses.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|To
|Time Interval for Check (In minutes)
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|'''Example:''' 10 minutes
|This is the target address to which the traffic  is being directed. In this case, all traffic destined for 192.168.10.1 will follow this route.
|Frequency at which the ping checks are performed.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|IPv4 Netmask
|Select No of IP addresses to ping
|255.255.255.192
|'''Example:''' 1
|This defines the subnet of the destination  address.
|Number of IP addresses that will be pinged.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Table
|IP Address 1
|1.) Local
|'''Example:''' 8.8.8.8
 
|The IP address to ping.
2.) Main
 
3.) Default
 
4.) 220
 
5.) custom
|1.) This table contains local routes for the  addresses assigned to the local interfaces. It's  typically used for host and broadcast addresses.
 
2.) The  primary routing table used by the system.
 
3.) A  fallback table used when no other table is specified.
 
4.) Often  used for policy-based routing.
 
5.) A user-defined  routing table.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|From
|No. of Retries
|Ex: 192.168.100.1
|'''Example:''' 5
|This source address restricts the route to  traffic originating from 192.168.100.1. Traffic from other sources won't use  this route.
|Number of times to retry pinging an IP address if the initial ping fails.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Priority
|Failure Criteria in (%)
|20
|'''Example:''' 80% (If 4 out of 5 pings fail, it’s considered a failure)
|The priority value determines the preference of this route. A lower number means higher priority; 20 is relatively high, so this route will be preferred over routes with higher priority values.
|Percentage of failed pings required to consider  the ping check a failure.
|}
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.
 
=== 5.6 Others ===
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters. Each utility serves a specific purpose, providing various functionalities for managing and troubleshooting network configurations and statuses.
 
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration v2.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|7
|Set Date
|Action On Failure
|Date and time fields (day, month, year,  hour, minute, second)
|'''Example:''' Restart Modem
|Sets the system date and time to the specified  values.
|Action to be taken if the ping check fails  according to the criteria.
|-
|-
|2
|8
|Get Date
|Enable Second Level Action
|System
|Enable/Disable
|Retrieves and displays the current system date and time.
|Option to enable a secondary action if the  primary action fails multiple times.
|-
|-
|3
|9
|ipsec status all
|Second Level Action Threshold
|Command ‘Get’
|'''Example:''' 2
|Displays the status of all IPsec connections.
|Number of failures required to trigger the secondary action.
|-
|-
|4
|10
|Wi-Fi Scan
|Second Level Action
|Command ‘Get’
|'''Example:''' Restart Board (Reboots  the entire hardware board)
|Initiates a scan for available Wi-Fi networks.
|The action to be taken if the second level  action threshold is met.
|}
Save the details once made necessary changes.
 
'''Router Monitor Application Configuration:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R ROUTER MONITOR APPLICATION CONFIGURATION.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|-
|5
|1
|iPerf3 Client
|Enable Ping Check Application
|IP address (e.g., 192.168.10.100)
|Enable/Disable
|Runs an iPerf3 client to measure network  performance.
|Activates the  ping check functionality to monitor router performance.
|-
|2
|Time Interval for Check (In minutes)
|'''Example:''' 10 minutes
|How  frequently the ping checks are performed.
|-
|3
|Select No of IP Addresses to Ping
|'''Example:''' 1 (Please select the appropriate number  based on your requirements)
|Choose the  number of IP addresses to ping. This typically involves selecting from a list  or entering multiple addresses.
|-
|4
|No. of Retries
|'''Example:''' 3
|Number of  retries if a ping fails.
|-
|5
|Failure Criteria in (%)
|'''Example:''' 80% (If 80% of the pings fail, it’s  deemed a failure)
|Percentage of  failed pings required to consider the ping check as failed.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|iPerf3 Server
|Action On Failure
|Command ‘Run’
|'''Example:''' Restart IPsec
|Runs an iPerf3 server to measure network  performance.
|The action  taken if the ping check fails according to the criteria.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Ping
|Enable Second Level Action
|IP address or domain (e.g., 8.8.8.8)
|Enable/Disable
|Sends ICMP echo requests to the specified  address to check connectivity.
|Option to enable an additional action if the primary action fails.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|traceroute
|Second Level Action Threshold
|IP address or domain (e.g., 8.8.8.8)
|'''Example:''' Specify the number of failures, such as 2
|Traces the route packets take to reach the specified address.
|Number of  times the primary action must fail before the secondary action is triggered.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|NTP Sync
|Second Level Action
|Command ‘Sync’
|'''Example:''' Restart Board
|Synchronizes the system time with the configured NTP server.
|The action to  be taken if the second level action threshold is met.
|-
|}
|10
Save the details once made necessary changes.
|Download Files
 
|File or database identifier
== 4.Status ==
|Initiates a download of the specified file or  database.
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.
|-
 
|11
It has 4 submodules.
|Restart Power
 
|Command ‘Restart’
* Interfaces
|Restarts the power of the device.
* Internet
|-
* Modem
|12
* Routes
|Restart Modem
 
|Command ‘Restart’
=== [[File:GRD44B 5R STATUS.png|1024x1024px]]4.1 Interfaces ===
|Restarts the modem.
Each network device (interface) is associated with specific traffic statistics, uptime, and status. Active interfaces are operational, while inactive interfaces are not currently transmitting data.
|-
 
|13
[[File:GRD44B 5R INTERFACE.png|1024x1024px]]
|Run AT Command
 
|Enter AT command
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular, wifi, ewan, vpn etc is up.
|Executes the specified AT command on the modem.
 
|-
=== 4.2 Internet ===
|14
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.
|Show Board Configuration
 
|Command ‘Show’
 To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.
|Displays the current board configuration.
|-
|15
|Show VPN Certificate Name
|Command ‘Show’
|Displays the name of the VPN certificate in  use.
|-
|16
|Switch SIM to Secondary (Takes >2 mins)
|Command ‘Run’
|Switches the active SIM to the secondary SIM  card.
|-
|17
|Send test SMS
|Phone number (e.g., +911234567890)  message text (e.g., "Hello how are you?")
|Sends a test SMS to the specified phone number.
|-
|18
|ReadlatestSMS
|Command ‘Read’
|Reads the most recent SMS received by the device.
|-
|19
|Data Usage
|'''From:''' Start  date (YYYY-MM-DD)


'''To:''' End date  (YYYY-MM-DD)
=== [[File:GRD44B 5R WAN STATUS.png|1024x1024px]] 4.3 Modem ===
|Displays data usage statistics for the  specified date range.
This modem status page provides comprehensive information about the cellular connection's network operator, technology, mode, and various signal quality metrics.  
|-
|20
|Monthly Data Usage
|'''Month:''' Month (e.g., 07)


'''Year:''' Year  (e.g., 2024)
[[File:GRD44B 5R MODEM.png|1024x1024px]]
|Displays data usage statistics for the  specified month and year.
 
=== 4.4 Routes ===
This configuration shows how the router directs traffic between different networks and interfaces, ensuring proper communication within the local network and to external networks via the default gateway.
 
'''ARP Table:''' Maps IP addresses to MAC addresses for devices on the network, helping in identifying which device is on which interface.
 
'''IPv4 Routes:''' This shows which network is directly connected on which interface.
 
Example: Network '''192.168.10.0/24''' is directly connected on interface '''eth0.1.'''
 
'''IPv6 Routes:''' Similar routes as IPv4, but this time listed under IPv6 routing rules.
 
Example: Local networks '''192.168.10.0/24''' and '''192.168.100.0/24''' are managed through '''eth0.1''' and '''ra0''', respectively.
 
''*Refer the below image*''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R ROUTES.png|1024x1024px]]
 
== 5. Features ==
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.
 
This module includes 7 features.
 
* Mac Address Binding
* URL Filtering
* Web Server
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering
* Routing
* DMZ
* Others
[[File:GDR44B 5R FEATURES.png|1024x1024px]]
 
=== 5.1 Mac Address Binding ===
MAC address binding is a configuration that binds a specific MAC address to a specific IP address. This ensures that a particular device on the network always receives the same IP address from the DHCP server, which can be useful for network management, security, and ensuring consistent network behaviour.
 
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC.
 
You can edit the pre-existing configuration, or you can ‘Add’ in the ‘New MAC ADDRESS’ field.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R MAC ADDRESS BINDING.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R MAC ADDRESS EDITING.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|-
|
|1
|
|Device Name
|
|Macbinding1
|
|A user-defined name for the binding  configuration.
|-
|-
|21
|2
|Modem Debug Info
|MAC Address
|Command ‘Read’
|48:9e:bd:da:45:91
|Displays debug information for the modem.
|The unique identifier for the network interface  of the device to which the IP address will be bound.
|-
|-
|22
|3
|Scan Network operators (Takes >3 mins)
|IP Address
|Command ‘Scan’
|192.168.10.55
|Initiates a scan for available network operators.
|The IP address that will be consistently assigned to the device with the specified MAC address.
|-
|}
|23
 
|Network operator list (First Perform  Scan Network Operators)
By applying this configuration, the DHCP server will always assign the IP address 192.168.10.55 to the device with the MAC address 48:9e:bd:da:45:91, ensuring consistency and stability in network addressing for that device.
|Command ‘Show’
 
|Displays the list of network operators detected  in the previous scan.
* Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.
|-
* The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.
|24
 
|ReadLogFiles
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.
|Log file identifier
 
|Reads and displays the specified log file
=== 5.2 URL Filtering ===
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device. By implementing URL filtering with the specified URL, you can control and restrict access to certain websites, thereby improving network security and managing user access.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R URL filtering.png|1024x1024px]]
 
 
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.
 
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save.
 
The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R URL ENABLE.png|1024x1024px]]
 
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R URL FILTER DISABLE.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Click on “save” after the changes are done as per the need.
 
=== 5.3 Web Server ===
This configuration will allow your device to serve web traffic securely over HTTPS, keep its system time synchronized, and ensure that all HTTP traffic is redirected to HTTPS for better security.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Web server.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''EDIT:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Web server edit.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|-
|25
|1
|Enable ssh (Admin)
|Enable HTTP
|Command ‘Run’
|'''HTTP Port:''' 80
|Enables SSH access for the admin user.
 
Enable or disable the HTTP server.
|Port 80 is the default port for HTTP traffic.  It is used to serve web pages over an unencrypted connection.
|-
|-
|26
|2
|Disable ssh (Admin)
|Enable HTTPS
|Command ‘Run’
|'''HTTPS Port:''' 443
|Disables SSH access for the admin user.
 
Enable or disable the HTTPS server.
|Port 443 is the default port for HTTPS traffic.  It is used to serve web pages over an encrypted connection.
|-
|-
|27
|3
|ClearSIM1Data
|Redirect HTTPS
|Command ‘Clear’
|Option to redirect HTTP traffic to  HTTPS.
|Clears data usage statistics for SIM1.
|When enabled, all HTTP requests will be  automatically redirected to the HTTPS port to ensure secure communication.
|-
|-
|28
|4
|ClearSIM2Data
|Session Timeout (in millisecs)
|Command ‘Clear’
|Ex: 60000
|Clears data usage statistics for SIM2.
|In this scenario the webpage will logout after  60secs of inactivity.
|-
|-
|29
|5
|Create Bridge with SW_LAN
|RFC1918 Filter
|Network interface identifier
|Enable/Disable
|Creates a network bridge with the specified  interface and SW_LAN.
|When enabled, this filter can block traffic  from private IP ranges (e.g., 192.168.x.x, 10.x.x.x) from being routed  through the public internet, enhancing network security.
|-
|-
|30
|6
|Show Bridge
|Enable NTP Sync
|Command ‘Show’
|Enable or disable NTP synchronization.
|Displays information about the current network bridges.
|Synchronizes the device’s system clock with an external NTP server to maintain accurate time.
|-
|-
|31
|7
|Delete Bridge
|NTP Server
|Command ‘Delete’
|0.openwrt.pool.ntp.org
|Deletes the specified network bridge.
|The address of the NTP server used for time  synchronization. The openwrt.pool.ntp.org server is a public NTP server pool.
|-
|-
|32
|8
|Output
|NTP Sync Interval (In Minutes)
|Any value
|15
|Displays output for all the above actions.
|The interval at which the device will sync its  clock with the NTP server, set to every 15 minutes in this case.
|}
|}
Click on save once changes are made.


=== 5.7 Connection Diagnostics ===
=== 5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering ===
This can ensure that your connection diagnostics application effectively monitors and reports the status of your network connections, providing valuable data for troubleshooting and performance optimization.
Wireless MAC ID Filtering allows you to control which devices can connect to your wireless network based on their MAC (Media Access Control) addresses. This can help enhance security by allowing only specified devices to access the network.
 
It is further divided into 2 categories,
 
'''WIFI 2.4G AP'''


[[File:GRD44B-5R Connection Diagnostics.png|frameless|620x620px]]
'''WIFI 2.4G AP Guest'''


This Application works in 3 parts,
[[File:GRD44B 5R Wireless mac address.png|1024x1024px]]


1.) General settings
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.


2.) Connection status and management
In ‘Change Mode’ select one option,


3.) Application Start/Stop
'''Blacklist'''


[[File:Connection Diagnostics dashboard.png|frameless|620x620px]]
In blacklist mode, you specify which MAC addresses are not allowed to connect to the wireless network. Devices not on the blacklist will be able to connect.


'''General settings:'''
'''Whitelist'''


First make configuration changes in this section and save.
In whitelist mode, you specify which MAC addresses are allowed to connect to the wireless network. Devices not on the whitelist will be blocked.


[[File:Connection Diagnostics General Settings.png|frameless|620x620px]]
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option.


Specification details are given below:
[[File:GRD44B 5R MACID ENABLING.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
Line 3,023: Line 3,352:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Enable Connection Diagnostics
|Status
|Enable/Disable
|Enable/Disable
|This option  enables or disables the connection diagnostics functionality.
|Enable or disable the MAC ID filtering.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Check Interval (in seconds)
|MAC ID
|'''Value:''' 120
|Example: e8:6f:38:1a:f2:61
|Specifies how  often (in seconds) the diagnostics checks are performed. In this case, every 120 seconds. (min 60 secs)
|The MAC address of the device to be whitelisted or blocklisted.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Number of Pings
|Network Name
|'''Value:''' 5
|Example: WIFI 2.4G AP or Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest.
|Determines ping  requests sent during each check.
|The network to apply the MAC ID filtering.
|-
|4
|Ping Packet Size (in Bytes)
|'''Value:''' 56
|Defines the  size of each ping packet in bytes.
|-
|5
|Send to remote MQTT Broker
|Enable/Disable
|This option  enables the sending of diagnostic data to a remote MQTT broker.
|-
|6
|Publish Data Format
|'''CSV''' / '''JSON'''
|Specifies the  format in which the diagnostic data will be published to the MQTT broker. You  can choose either CSV (Comma-Separated Values) or JSON (JavaScript Object  Notation).
|-
|7
|MQTT Broker url
|'''Value:''' broker.hivemq.com
|The URL of  the MQTT broker where the diagnostic data will be sent.
|-
|8
|TCP port
|'''Value:''' 1883
|The TCP port used to connect to the MQTT broker. Port 1883 is the default port for MQTT.
|-
|9
|Topic
|'''Value:''' 37A26230014/connectionDiagnostics
|The MQTT  topic under which the diagnostic data will be published. This topic is used  to categorize and identify the data.
|}
|}
Once the required MAC ID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.


The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.


'''Connection status and management:'''
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.


To setup a connection,
=== 5.5 Routing ===
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device like Target address, Networks address etc. Routing configurations allow network packets to be directed between different subnets and networks.


Click on ‘Add new target’
It is further divided into 2 sections,


Enter Target IP (Ex: 8.8.8.8)
'''Static IPV4 Routes'''


Click ‘Add’
'''Advanced Static IPV4 Routes'''


Target has been added successfully.
'''Static IPV4 Routes:'''


[[File:Connection status and management.png|frameless|620x620px]]
Click on ‘Add’ to add a new interface.


[[File:GRD44B 5R Static routing.png|1024x1024px]]


'''Application Start/Stop:'''


To check whether the target Ip is sending and receiving packets, you need to start the application to see the desired output.
'''EDIT:'''


[[File:Application Start-Stop.png|frameless|620x620px]]
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.


As shown above, our target Ip is sending packets successfully.
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.


You can Add as many target IP’s you need to monitor.
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.
 
You can leave the application on for monitoring else ‘Stop’ the application.
 
= 6.Configuration =
These are gateway features that can be configured as per requirements.
 
It is divided into 5 sections,
 
1.) Source Configuration


2.) Send Configuration
[[File:GRD44B 5R STATIC IPV4 ROUTES EDIT.png|1024x1024px]]
 
3.) Port Configuration
 
4.) Cloud Configuration
 
5.) Modbus Configuration
 
[[File:GRD44B-5R Configuration Dashboard.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
=== 6.1 Source Configuration ===
These configurations ensure that the system regularly acquires data from various interfaces (RS485, RS232, DIO, and AI) at specified intervals, allowing for efficient monitoring and management of connected devices and sensors.
 
[[File:Source Configuration 2.png|frameless|620x620px]]




Line 3,127: Line 3,407:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Enable  RS485Line1
|Interface
|Enable/Disable
|Ex: eth0.1
|This option enables the RS485 Line 1 interface for energy meter readings.
|The network interface to be used for this route. Select the one to use from dropdown.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Overall  Periodicity of RS485 Line 1 Energy meter Readings (In Seconds >= 60)
|Target
|'''Value:'''  120
|Ex: 192.168.20.0
|Defines the  interval in seconds at which readings are taken from the RS485 Line 1 energy meter. The minimum allowable interval is 60 seconds.
|The destination subnet to which traffic should be routed.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Delay between  each Energy meter Readings (in Milliseconds)
|IPv4 Netmask
|'''Value:'''  2000
|255.255.255.0
|Specifies the delay in milliseconds between individual readings from the energy meter on  RS485 Line 1.
|The subnet mask for the target network.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Enable DIO
|Metric
|Enable/Disable
|0
|This option  enables the Digital Input/Output (DIO) interface.
|The priority of the route.
 
Lower values indicate higher priority.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Overall  Periodicity of Digital input/output (In Seconds >= 60)
|IPv4 Gateway
|'''Value:'''  120
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|Defines the interval in seconds at which readings or updates are taken from the DIO interfaceThe minimum allowable interval is 60 seconds.
|The gateway IP address to be used for routing traffic to the target subnet.
|-
|6
|Route Type
|Unicast
|Standard route for individual destination IP addresses.
 
Custom changes can be made.
|}
|}
Click on save once changes have been made.
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.  


=== 6.2 Send Configuration ===
'''Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:'''
Send configuration allows to choose type of string that should be sent to a cloud platform.


SILBO devices do offer 3 different options as shown below.
Click on ‘Add’ to add a new interface.  


CSV (CSV allows fixed CSV)
[[File:GRD44B 5R Advanced static routing.png|1024x1024px]]


Fixed JSON
'''EDIT:'''


Editable JSON. (JSON option is the editable JSON option)
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.


[[File:Send Configuration .png|frameless|620x620px]]
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.


Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.


[[File:GRD44B 5R Advanced static routing EDITING.png|1024x1024px]]


Data sender Configuration is divided into major 2 parts,
Specification details are given below:


'''JSON'''
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Interface
|Ex: ra0
|The network interface through which the traffic  will be routed. Select as per requirement.
|-
|2
|To
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|This is the target address to which the traffic  is being directed. In this case, all traffic destined for 192.168.10.1 will  follow this route.
|-
|3
|IPv4 Netmask
|255.255.255.192
|This defines the subnet of the destination  address.
|-
|4
|Table
|1.) Local


'''CSV'''
2.) Main


JSON is further divided into 1 category,
3.) Default


4.) 220


5.) custom
|1.) This table contains local routes for the  addresses assigned to the local interfaces. It's  typically used for host and broadcast addresses.


'''Modbus Sender:'''
2.) The  primary routing table used by the system.


[[File:Modbus Sender.png|frameless|620x620px]]
3.) A  fallback table used when no other table is specified.


Select the field input you wish to add from the ‘Field Content tab’.
4.) Often  used for policy-based routing.


Give a desired JSON Key Name you wish to publish in the ‘Field JSON Key Name’ tab.
5.) A  user-defined routing table.
 
|-
Once configured, click on Add.
|5
 
|From
JSON option allows editable JSON in which we can change which parameters should be sent and what name we should use to the tag.
|Ex: 192.168.100.1
 
|This source address restricts the route to traffic originating from 192.168.100.1. Traffic from other sources won't use  this route.
[[File:Modbus Sender a1.png|frameless|620x620px]]
|-
 
|6
 
|Priority
What changes we can do in JSON edit to the above list.
|20
 
|The priority value determines the preference of  this route. A lower number means higher priority; 20 is relatively high, so  this route will be preferred over routes with higher priority values.
Let’s change slave_id to some other name as “Slave number”.
|}
 
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.
[[File:Modbus Sender 1.b.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
Even custom fields can be added, for example if location name should be sent by router/gateway in JSON packet then it can be configured as shown.
 
[[File:Modbus Sender 1.c.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
 
 
'''CSV:'''


This option sends data packets in CSV (Comma-Separated Values) format.
=== 5.6 DMZ ===
A '''DMZ (Demilitarized Zone)''' is a subnetwork that provides an extra layer of security for an organization's internal network.


[[File:RS232 Sender Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
In this case we are configuring several services (HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, FTP, DNS) in a DMZ, and each service requires the correct '''internal port''' (the port used within the network) and '''external port''' (the port used by external clients to access the service) settings.


[[File:GRD44B 5R DMZ.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
Line 3,220: Line 3,529:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Device ID
|Enable DMZ
|GRD44B-5R
|Enable/Disable
|A unique identifier  for the device.
|Enable DMZ to configure it further.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Record Start Mark
|Host IP Address
|[
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|This character marks the beginning of a data record. It's used to indicate where a new data record starts in the transmitted packet.
|This is the internal IP address of the device or server that will be in the DMZ.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Record End Mark
|Protocol
|]
|1.) TCP
|This character marks the end of a data record. It signals the end of the data for  one record before a new one starts.
 
2.) UDP
 
3.) ICMP
 
4.) All
|'''TCP''': Used  for reliable services like HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, and SSH.
 
'''UDP''': Often used for services like DNS that don't require as much reliability.
 
'''ICMP''': Used  for sending control messages like "ping."
 
'''All''': Select this if you're unsure which protocol to allow, but it's less secure.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Register Start Mark
|Allow HTTP
|<
|Internal Port: 80
|This character marks the beginning of a register within a data record. A register typically represents an individual data field within the record.
 
External Port: 80
|Enables web traffic over the unsecured '''HTTP''' protocol.
 
(Port 80 is the standard port for HTTP traffic on our internal network).
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Register End Mark
|Allow HTTPS
|>
|Internal Port: 443
|This  character marks the end of a register within a data record. It indicates where the data for a particular field end.
 
External Port: 443
|Enables secure web traffic over '''HTTPS.''' (Port 443 is the standard port for HTTPS on our internal network).
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Invalid Data Character
|Allow SSH
|N
|Internal Port: 52434
|Used to  indicate that the data for a particular register is invalid or could not be collected.  This helps in identifying which data points are not usable.
 
External Port: 52434
|This is a custom port we’re using for SSH.
 
The default is 22.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Failure Data Character
|Allow FTP
|NA
|Internal Port: 21/20
|Used to  indicate that there was a failure in collecting or processing the data for a  particular register. It signifies that an error occurred, and the data point  could not be obtained.
|}
Click on save once changes are made.


=== 6.3 Port Configuration ===
External Port: 21/20
Serial port configuration involves setting parameters for serial communication, allowing data exchange between devices via serial ports.
|FTP is used to transfer files between computers.


Port Configuration is divided into 4 port mode,
(These are the standard ports for FTP traffic.  Port 21 is used for control commands, and port 20 for the data transfer.)
|-
|8
|Allow DNS
|Internal Port: 53


'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client'''
External Port: 53
|Standard DNS port within our internal network.
|}


'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server'''
=== 5.7 Others ===
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters. Each utility serves a specific purpose, providing various functionalities for managing and troubleshooting network configurations and statuses.


'''Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave'''
[[File:GRD44B 5R MISC UTILITIES.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave'''
 
[[File:Port Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
 
'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client:'''
 
[[File:Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client.png|frameless|620x620px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
Line 3,284: Line 3,610:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Port Mode
|Set Date
|Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client
|Date and time fields (day, month, year,  hour, minute, second)
|Configures  the serial port to send data directly to a remote TCP client without any additional protocol layers, making it "transparent."
|Sets the system date and time to the specified values.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Transparent Serial Port Mode
|Get Date
|1.) raw
|System
 
|Retrieves and displays the current system date and time.
2.) rawlp
 
3.) telnet
 
4.) off
|1.) It's a  straightforward data transfer where the serial data is sent as-is.
 
2.)  "Rawlp" stands for "raw with local processing". Typically, it involves some minimal local processing before transmission.
 
3.) This  allows the serial connection to be accessed and managed over a Telnet  session.
 
4.) The  "off" mode disables the transparent serial port functionality.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Time Out
|ipsec status all
|no time out
|Command ‘Get’
|Ensures that  the serial port does not time out, meaning it will continuously wait for data  without closing the connection due to inactivity.
|Displays the status of all IPsec connections.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|Local Listener TCP Port
|Wi-Fi Scan
|3040
|Command ‘Get’
|Sets the TCP  port number to 3040 for the local listener to accept incoming TCP  connections.
|Initiates a scan for available Wi-Fi networks.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Baud Rate
|iPerf3 Client
|9600
|IP address (e.g., 192.168.10.100)
|This is a common baud rate for serial communication, balancing speed and reliability.
|Runs an iPerf3 client to measure network performance.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|No Of Stopbits
|iPerf3 Server
|1
|Command ‘Run’
|Configures  the serial communication to use 1 stop bit, which is a common setting  ensuring the end of each byte is clearly marked.
|Runs an iPerf3 server to measure network performance.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|No Of Databits
|Ping
|8
|IP address or domain (e.g., 8.8.8.8)
|Sets the  number of bits in each transmitted byte to 8.
|Sends ICMP echo requests to the specified address to check connectivity.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Parity
|traceroute
|1.) None
|IP address or domain (e.g., 8.8.8.8)
 
|Traces the route packets take to reach the  specified address.
2.) Even
 
3.) Odd
 
4.) Space
 
5.) Mark
|1.) No parity  bit is added to the data byte.
 
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.
 
3.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
 
4.) The  parity bit is always set to 0, regardless of the data.
 
5.) The parity bit is always set to 1, regardless of the data.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Flow Control
|NTP Sync
|1.) RTSCTS
|Command ‘Sync’
 
|Synchronizes the system time with the configured NTP server.
2.) NONE
 
3.) DTRDSR
 
4.) XONXOFF
|1.) Request  to Send / Clear to Send
 
2.) No flow  control is used.
 
3.) Data  Terminal Ready / Data Set Ready
 
4.) Software  flow control using specific control characters (XON and XOFF) to manage data flow.
|-
|-
|10
|10
|Read Trace
|Download Files
|Enable/Disable
|File or database identifier
|Enables  logging of data being read from the serial port.
|Initiates a download of the specified file or  database.
|-
|-
|11
|11
|Write Trace
|Restart Power
|Enable/Disable
|Command ‘Restart’
|Enables  logging of data being written to the serial port.
|Restarts the power of the device.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes are made.
 
'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server:'''
 
Configures the port to act as a bridge, converting serial data into TCP packets sent to a remote TCP server.
 
[[File:Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server-.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|12
|Port Mode
|Restart Modem
|Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server
|Command ‘Restart’
|Defines how  the serial port will operate in relation to the remote server.
|Restarts the modem.
|-
|-
|2
|13
|Remote Server IP
|Run AT Command
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|Enter AT command
|'''Field must  not be empty:''' This is a required field, and you must provide a valid IP  address for proper communication.
|Executes the specified AT command on the modem.
|-
|-
|3
|14
|Remote Server Port
|Show Board Configuration
|Ex: 1883
|Command ‘Show’
|'''Field must  not be empty:''' This is a required field, and you must specify the correct port number used by the server.
|Displays the current board configuration.
|-
|15
|Show VPN Certificate Name
|Command ‘Show’
|Displays the name of the VPN certificate in use.
|-
|-
|4
|16
|Transparent Serial Port Mode
|Switch SIM to Secondary (Takes >2 mins)
|1.) raw
|Command ‘Run’
 
|Switches the active SIM to the secondary SIM card.
2.) rawlp
 
3.) telnet
 
4.) off
|1.) It's a  straightforward data transfer where the serial data is sent as-is.
 
2.)  "Rawlp" stands for "raw with local processing". Typically,  it involves some minimal local processing before transmission.
 
3.) This  allows the serial connection to be accessed and managed over a Telnet  session.
 
4.) The "off" mode disables the transparent serial port functionality.
|-
|-
|5
|17
|Time Out
|Send test SMS
|no time out
|Phone number (e.g., +911234567890)  message text (e.g., "Hello how are you?")
|Ensures that  the serial port does not time out, meaning it will continuously wait for data  without closing the connection due to inactivity.
|Sends a test SMS to the specified phone number.
|-
|-
|6
|18
|Local Listener Interface IP Address
|ReadlatestSMS
|
|Command ‘Read’
|'''Field must not be empty:''' This is a required field for specifying which local IP address will be used for listening.
|Reads the most recent SMS received by the  device.
|-
|19
|Data Usage
|'''From:''' Start date (YYYY-MM-DD)
 
'''To:''' End date  (YYYY-MM-DD)
|Displays data usage statistics for the specified date range.
|-
|-
|7
|20
|Local Listener TCP Port
|Monthly Data Usage
|3040
|'''Month:''' Month (e.g., 07)
|The TCP port number on the local device that will be used to listen for incoming data.
 
'''Year:''' Year  (e.g., 2024)
|Displays data usage statistics for the specified month and year.
|-
|-
|
|
Line 3,445: Line 3,718:
|
|
|-
|-
|8
|21
|Baud Rate
|Modem Debug Info
|9600
|Command ‘Read’
|Standard baud  rate, common for many serial devices.
|Displays debug information for the modem.
|-
|-
|9
|22
|No Of Stopbits
|Scan Network operators (Takes >3  mins)
|1
|Command ‘Scan’
|Indicates that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
|Initiates a scan for available network operators.
|-
|-
|10
|23
|No Of Databits
|Network operator list (First Perform  Scan Network Operators)
|8
|Command ‘Show’
|Indicates that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
|Displays the list of network operators detected in the previous scan.
|-
|24
|ReadLogFiles
|Log file identifier
|Reads and displays the specified log file
|-
|-
|11
|25
|Parity
|Enable ssh (Admin)
|1.) None
|Command ‘Run’
 
|Enables SSH access for the admin user.
2.) Even
 
3.) Odd
 
4.) Space
 
5.) Mark
|1.) No parity  bit is added to the data byte.
 
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.
 
3.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
 
4.) The  parity bit is always set to 0, regardless of the data.
 
5.) The  parity bit is always set to 1, regardless of the data.
|-
|-
|12
|26
|Flow Control
|Disable ssh (Admin)
|1.) RTSCTS
|Command ‘Run’
 
|Disables SSH access for the admin user.
2.) NONE
|-
 
|27
3.) DTRDSR
|ClearSIM1Data
|Command ‘Clear’
|Clears data usage statistics for SIM1.
|-
|28
|ClearSIM2Data
|Command ‘Clear’
|Clears data usage statistics for SIM2.
|-
|29
|Create Bridge with SW_LAN
|Network interface identifier
|Creates a network bridge with the specified interface  and SW_LAN.
|-
|30
|Show Bridge
|Command ‘Show’
|Displays information about the current network  bridges.
|-
|31
|Delete Bridge
|Command ‘Delete’
|Deletes the specified network bridge.
|-
|32
|Output
|Any value
|Displays output for all the above actions.
|}


4.) XONXOFF
=== 5.8 SNMP Agent Configuration ===
|1.) Request  to Send / Clear to Send
The '''SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Agent Configuration''' is essential for monitoring and managing network devices, such as routers, from a central management system.


2.) No flow  control is used.
[[File:GRD44B 5R SNMP Agent Configuration.png|1024x1024px]]


3.) Data  Terminal Ready / Data Set Ready
Specification details are given below:
 
{| class="wikitable"
4.) Software  flow control using specific control characters (XON and XOFF) to manage data  flow.
|SN
|-
|13
|Read Trace
|Enable/Disable
|Option to  enable tracing of incoming data from the serial port, useful for debugging.
|-
|14
|Write Trace
|Enable/Disable
|Option to  enable tracing of outgoing data from the serial port, useful for debugging.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes are made.
 
 
'''Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave:'''
 
Configures the serial port to function as a Modbus TCP Master that communicates with a Modbus RTU Slave over the serial connection.
 
This setup is used to send Modbus TCP commands to a Modbus RTU device via a serial-to-TCP gateway.
 
[[File:Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Sample  Value
Line 3,527: Line 3,792:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Port Mode
|Enable SNMP  Service
|Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave
|Enable/Disable
|This setup is used to send Modbus TCP commands to a Modbus RTU device via a serial-to-TCP gateway.
|Enable this if you want the device to be accessible for SNMP-based monitoring and management.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Baud Rate
|IP Family
|9600
|IPV4
|The speed at which data is transmitted over the serial connection.
|Specifies that SNMP service will operate over IPv4.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Parity
|Port
|1.) None
|161
 
|'''161''' is  the default and should be used unless there is a specific need to use a different port.
2.) Even
 
3.) Odd
|1.) No parity  bit is used, meaning no additional error-checking bits are included.
 
2.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.
 
3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|No of Stopbits
|System OID
|1
|1.3.6.1.4.1.38151
|Indicates that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
|This unique identifier represents the device in the SNMP management system.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|No of Databits
|Name
|8
|Invendis  Router
|Indicates that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
|The name used to identify the device in the SNMP management system.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Local Listener Interface IP Address
|Contact
|
|Invendis@invendis.co
|'''Field must not be empty:''' You need to provide a valid IP address where the TCP connections will be received.
|The email address of the person responsible for the device, used for administrative contact.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|TCP Port
|Location
|502
|Bangalore
|This is the standard port for Modbus TCP communication.
|The physical  location of the device.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Max. Number of Retries
|SNMP Version
|5
|Version-1,
|The maximum  number of times to retry sending a request if the initial attempt fails.
 
Version-2,
 
Version-3
|'''Version-1''':  Basic and outdated, offering no security.
 
'''Version-2''':  An improvement over Version-1 with better performance and some security  features.
 
'''Version-3''':  The most secure, offering authentication and encryption (AuthPriv).
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Delay Between Each Request (In milliseconds)
|Security       (for SNMP Version-3)
|500
|NoAuthNoPriv
|The delay between consecutive Modbus requests to avoid overwhelming the system or device.
 
AuthNoPriv
 
AuthPriv
|'''No Authentication, No Privacy'''
 
'''Authentication,  No Privacy'''
 
'''Authentication and Privacy'''
|-
|-
|10
|10
|Response Wait Time (In milliseconds)
|Username
|500
|Ex: admin
|The maximum time to wait for a response from the Modbus RTU Slave before considering the  request failed.
|The username used for SNMP authentication.
|-
|-
|11
|11
|Connection Timeout (In seconds)
|Authentication  Password
|0
|*******
|A value of 0 typically means no timeout is set, so the system will wait indefinitely.
|This password is used to authenticate the SNMP user.
|-
|-
|12
|12
|Inactivity Timeout (In seconds)
|Privacy  Password
|
|*******
|The time to  wait before closing a connection if no activity is detected.
|This password  is used to encrypt SNMP messages.
|-
|13
|Download MIB  File
|Download
|Click this to  download the MIB file associated with the device’s SNMP configuration.
|}
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.


'''Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave:'''


Configures the serial port to function as a Modbus RTU Master that communicates with a Modbus TCP Slave over a network. This setup is used to send Modbus RTU commands from a master device to a Modbus TCP device via a TCP-to-serial gateway.
Click on save tab to save changes.


[[File:Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave.png|alt=Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave|frameless|620x620px]]
=== 5.9 Connection Diagnostics ===
This can ensure that your connection diagnostics application effectively monitors and reports the status of your network connections, providing valuable data for troubleshooting and performance optimization.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Connection Diagnostics.png|1024x1024px]]
 
This Application works in 3 parts,
 
1.) General settings
 
2.) Connection status and management
 
3.) Application Start/Stop
 
[[File:RB44_Application_Start_Stop.png|1024x1024px]]
'''General settings:'''
 
First make configuration changes in this section and save.
 
[[File:RD44A_Connection_Diagnostics_General_Settings.png|1005x1005px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
Line 3,610: Line 3,904:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Port Mode
|Enable Connection Diagnostics
|Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave
|Enable/Disable
|This setup is used to send Modbus RTU commands from a master device to a Modbus TCP device  via a TCP-to-serial gateway.
|This option enables or disables the connection diagnostics functionality.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Baud Rate
|Check Interval (in seconds)
|9600
|'''Value:''' 120
|The speed at which data is transmitted over the serial connection.
|Specifies how often (in seconds) the diagnostics checks are performed. In this case, every  120 seconds. (min 60 secs)
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Parity
|Number of Pings
|1.) None
|'''Value:''' 5
 
|Determines ping requests sent during each check.
2.) Even
 
3.) Odd
|1.) No parity bit is used, meaning no additional error-checking bits are included.
 
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.
 
3.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
|-
|-
|4
|4
|No of Stopbits
|Ping Packet Size (in Bytes)
|1
|'''Value:''' 56
|Indicates that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
|Defines the size of each ping packet in bytes.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|No of Databits
|Send to remote MQTT Broker
|8
|Enable/Disable
|Indicates that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
|This option enables the sending of diagnostic data to a remote MQTT broker.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|TCP Slave Address
|Publish Data Format
|Field must not be empty
|'''CSV''' / '''JSON'''
|The IP address of the Modbus TCP Slave device to which the master will send requests.
|Specifies the format in which the diagnostic data will be published to the MQTT broker. You  can choose either CSV (Comma-Separated Values) or JSON (JavaScript Object  Notation).
|-
|-
|7
|7
|TCP Slave Port
|MQTT Broker url
|Field must not be empty
|'''Value:''' broker.hivemq.com
|The port number on the Modbus TCP Slave device for receiving Modbus requests.
|The URL of the MQTT broker where the diagnostic data will be sent.
|-
|-
|8
|8
|Max. Number of Retries
|TCP port
|5
|'''Value:''' 1883
|The maximum number of times to retry sending a request if the initial attempt fails.
|The TCP port used to connect to the MQTT broker. Port 1883 is the default port for MQTT.
|-
|-
|9
|9
|Delay Between Each Request (In milliseconds)
|Topic
|Field must not be empty
|'''Value:''' 37A26230014/connectionDiagnostics
|The delay between consecutive Modbus requests to avoid overwhelming the system.
|The MQTT topic under which the diagnostic data will be published. This topic is used to categorize and identify the data.
|-
|}
|10
 
|Response Wait Time (In milliseconds)
 
|500
'''Connection status and management:'''
|The maximum time to wait for a response from the Modbus TCP Slave before considering the request failed.
 
|-
To setup a connection,
|11
 
|Connection Timeout (In seconds)
Click on ‘Add new target’
|0
 
|A value of 0  typically means no timeout is set, so the system will wait indefinitely.
Enter Target IP (Ex: 8.8.8.8)
|-
 
|12
Click ‘Add’
|Inactivity Timeout (In seconds)
 
|Field must not be empty
Target has been added successfully.
|The time to  wait before closing a connection if no activity is detected.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.  


=== 6.4 Cloud Configuration ===
[[File:RB44_Connection_status_and_management.png|1024x1024px]]
In this section you can select the protocol by which you need to send data to cloud.


There are 3 Cloud/Protocol available,
'''Application Start/Stop:'''


'''HTTP'''
To check whether the target Ip is sending and receiving packets, you need to start the application to see the desired output.


'''MQTT'''
[[File:RB44_Application_Start_Stop_1.png|980x980px]]


'''Azure'''
As shown above, our target Ip is sending packets successfully.


[[File:Cloud Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
You can Add as many target IP’s you need to monitor.


'''HTTP Cloud/Protocol:'''
You can leave the application on for monitoring else ‘Stop’ the application.


This configuration sets up communication between your device and cloud service using the HTTP cloud.
=== 5.10 Package Manager ===
A '''Package Manager''' is a tool or interface used to '''manage software packages''' (applications, libraries, tools) on a system.


[[File:HTTP Cloud-Protocol.png|frameless|620x620px]]
The package manager interface you are looking at likely allows you to manage the software installed on your device, such as networking tools, firmware, or other applications relevant to your system.
 
This section has 3 sub-sections,
 
Installed APP
 
Available APP
 
Manual Upgrade
 
[[File:RB44_Package_Manager.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''Installed APP:'''
 
When you select Installed APP, you will see all the software that is actively running or installed on the device.
 
This could include system utilities, network management tools, monitoring software, or any third-party apps that were previously installed.
 
'''Common Actions''':
 
* '''View Details''': You can check each application's version, source, and    installation date.
* '''Uninstall''': You can remove applications that are no longer needed.
* '''Check for Updates''': You can see if there are updates available for any    installed application.
 
 
'''Available APP''':
 
When you select '''Available APP''', you will see a list of software that can be installed from the system's repositories or sources.
 
These applications are not yet installed but are ready for installation if needed.
 
 
'''Common Actions''':
 
* '''Install''': You can install any of the available applications by selecting them.
* '''View Details''': You can review each application's description, version, and    functionality before installing.
* '''Search''': You can search for specific apps by name or category.
 
 
'''Manual Upgrade''':
 
In contrast to automatic updates, '''Manual Upgrade''' lets you take control over which packages or applications you want to upgrade and when.
 
This can be useful if you need to avoid upgrading certain apps due to compatibility or testing purposes, or if you want to perform updates at a specific time.
 
'''Common Actions''':
 
* '''Check for Updates''': The system will check for available updates for installed    apps.
* '''Select Updates''': You can select which packages to update manually.
* '''Upgrade Now''': You can start the upgrade process immediately for selected apps.


Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Site ID
|Ex: ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’.
|A unique  identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
|-
|2
|Cloud / Protocol
|HTTP
|The protocol  used for communication with the cloud service.
|-
|3
|HTTP URL
|'''Example:''' www.httpbin.org/post
|The endpoint  URL of the cloud service where data will be sent.
|-
|4
|HTTP Port (Optional)
|Leave it blank for the default port.
|The port  number for the HTTP connection. This is optional because the default port for  HTTP (80) is used if not specified.
|-
|5
|Enable Authentication
|Enable/Disable
|Enable this  if your cloud service requires a username and password.
|-
|6
|Username
|'''Example:''' admin
|The username  for authentication with the cloud service.
|-
|7
|Password
|*****
|The password  for authentication with the cloud service.
|-
|8
|Enable Server Response Validation
|Enable/Disable
|Enable this  if you need to verify that the server's response is valid.
|-
|9
|Server Response
|Ex: RecordID or custom
|A unique  identifier for the record being sent to the cloud service.
|-
|10
|Method
|1.) Post


2.) Get
== 6.Configuration ==
|1.) The HTTP  method used for sending data to the cloud service.
These are gateway features that can be configured as per requirements.


2.) The HTTP  method used for requesting data from the cloud service.
It is divided into 5 sections,
|}
'''MQTT Cloud/Protocol:'''


This configuration sets up communication between your device and a cloud service using the MQTT protocol.
1.) Source Configuration


[[File:MQTT Cloud-Protocol.png|frameless|620x620px]]
2.) Send Configuration


Specification details are given below:
3.) Port Configuration
{| class="wikitable"
 
|SN
4.) Cloud Configuration
|Field  Name
 
5.) Modbus Configuration
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Configuration.png|1024x1024px]]
 
=== 6.1 Source Configuration ===
These configurations ensure that the system regularly acquires data from various interfaces at specified intervals, allowing for efficient monitoring and management of connected devices and sensors.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Source config.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Sample  Value
|Description
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Site ID
|Enable  RS485Line1
|Example:  ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’.
|Enable/Disable
|A unique identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
|This option enables the RS485 Line 1 interface for energy meter readings.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Cloud / Protocol
|Overall  Periodicity of RS485 Line 1 Energy meter Readings (In Seconds >= 60)
|MQTT
|'''Value:'''  120
|The protocol used for communication with the cloud service.
|Defines the interval in seconds at which readings are taken from the RS485 Line 1 energy meter.  The minimum allowable interval is 60 seconds.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|MQTT Host
|Delay between each Energy meter Readings (in Milliseconds)
|'''Example:''' broker.hivemq.com
|'''Value:''' 2000
|The MQTT broker's address (hostname or IP address) that the device will connect to for  sending and receiving messages.
|Specifies the  delay in milliseconds between individual readings from the energy meter on RS485 Line 1.
|-
|}
|4
Click on save once changes have been made.
|MQTT Port
|'''Example:''' 1883
|This is the  default port for unencrypted MQTT connections.
|-
|5
|Authentication Mode
|1.) No Authentication


2.) Username/Password
=== 6.2 Send Configuration ===
Send configuration allows to choose type of string that should be sent to a cloud platform.


3.) TLS
SILBO devices do offer 3 different options as shown below.
|1.) Connect  to the broker without any credentials.
 
CSV (CSV allows fixed CSV)
 
Fixed JSON


2.) The  Username/Password for authentication with the cloud service.
Editable JSON. (JSON option is the editable JSON option)


3.) Upload  TLS certificates only if TLS authentication is selected as shown in the above  image.
[[File:GRD44B 5R Data sender config.png|1024x1024px]]
|-
|6
|Enable Publish Over LAN
|Enable/Disable
|When enabled,  the device will also publish MQTT messages over the local area network (LAN).
|-
|7
|RS485 Topic (Optional)
|'''Example:''' RS485Data1
|The MQTT  topic for publishing RS485 data.
|-
|8
|Command Request Topic (Optional)
|'''Example:''' CommandRequest1
|The topic to  which the device listens for command requests. Leave it blank if not in use.
|-
|9
|Command Response Topic (Optional)
|'''Example:''' CommandResponse1
|The topic on  which the device publishes responses to commands. Leave it blank if not in  use.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.


Data sender Configuration is divided into major 2 parts,


'''Azure:'''
'''JSON'''


This configuration sets up the connection to Azure IoT Hub using either MQTT or HTTP protocols with a specified connection string.
'''CSV'''


[[File:Azure Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
JSON is further divided into 1 category,


Specification details are given below:
'''Modbus Sender:'''
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Site ID
|Example:  ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’.
|A unique  identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
|-
|2
|Cloud / Protocol
|Azure
|The cloud  service and protocol used for communication.
|-
|3
|Protocol
|1.) MQTT


2.) HTTP
[[File:GRD44B 5R Modbus sender.png|1024x1024px]]
|1.) A  lightweight messaging protocol suitable for IoT devices.


2.) A  protocol used for communication over the web, commonly used for RESTful  services.
Select the field input you wish to add from the ‘Field Content tab’.
|-
|4
|Connection String
|e.g., invendis-iot-hub.azure-devices.net.
|The primary  or secondary key used to authenticate the device with the IoT Hub.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.


=== 6.5 Modbus Configuration ===
Give a desired JSON Key Name you wish to publish in the ‘Field JSON Key Name’ tab.
Modbus Configuration involves setting up communication parameters for Modbus devices, including baud rate, parity, stop bits, data bits, TCP/RTU settings, and timeout/retry settings for reliable data exchange.


Click on “Add Device” to start a new configuration.
Once configured, click on Add.


This Configuration has 4 sections,
JSON option allows editable JSON in which we can change which parameters should be sent and what name we should use to the tag.


1.) Parameter Configuration
[[File:GRD44B 5R Modbus sender 1.png|1024x1024px]]


2.) Block Config
What changes we can do in JSON edit to the above list.


3.) Register Config
Let’s change slave_id to some other name as “Slave number”.


4.) Alarm/Event Config
[[File:GRD44B 5R Modbus sender 2.png|1024x1024px]]


[[File:IA44 C Modbus Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]


'''Parameter Configuration:'''
Even custom fields can be added, for example if location name should be sent by router/gateway in JSON packet then it can be configured as shown.


As shown in the image below, there are two types of protocol used in Modbus configuration.
[[File:Modbus sender 3.png|1024x1024px]]


1.) RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)
'''CSV:'''


2.) TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
This option sends data packets in CSV (Comma-Separated Values) format.


Details of both protocols is mentioned in the specification table.
[[File:GRD44B 5R CSV.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''Modbus Protocol: RTU'''
 
[[File:Modbus Protocol- RTU.png|frameless|620x620px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|
|SN
|
|Field  Name
|'''Modbus protocol: RTU'''
|Sample  Value
|
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|DEVICE NAME
|Device ID
|Ex: Invendis
|GRD44B-5R
|This is the name assigned to the Modbus device for identification purposes.
|A unique identifier for the device.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Baud rate
|Record Start Mark
|<nowiki>300 | 1200 | 1800 | 2400 | 4800 | 19200 38400 | default: 9600</nowiki>
|[
|The baud rate determines the communication speed between devices, measured in bits per second.
|This character marks the beginning of a data record. It's used to indicate where a new data record starts in the transmitted packet.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Parity
|Record End Mark
|1.) NONE
|]
 
|This character marks the end of a data record. It signals the end of the data for one record before a new one starts.
2.) ODD
|-
 
|4
3.) EVEN
|Register Start Mark
|1.) No parity bit is added to the data byte.
|<
 
|This character marks the beginning of a register within a data record. A register typically represents an individual data field within the record.
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in
 
the data byte plus the parity bit is even.
 
3.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
|-
|4
|Meter ID
|1
|The Meter ID is a unique identifier for the specific meter within the network. Each Modbus device on the network must have a unique ID to differentiate it from others.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Meter Model
|Register End Mark
|Example: abcd
|>
|This field specifies the model of the meter.
|This  character marks the end of a register within a data record. It indicates  where the data for a particular field end.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Port number
|Invalid Data Character
|RS485 Port-1
|N
|This specifies which RS485 port on the device is being used for communication.
|Used to indicate that the data for a particular register is invalid or could not be  collected. This helps in identifying which data points are not usable.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Slave Address
|Failure Data Character
|Example: '''1'''
|NA
|The slave address identifies the specific slave device on the Modbus network. Each slave must  have a unique address so that the master can communicate with it individually.
|Used to indicate that there was a failure in collecting or processing the data for particular register. It signifies that an error occurred, and the data point could not be obtained.
|-
|}
|8
Click on save once changes are made.
|No. of Databits
|7/8
|Indicates  that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
|-
|9
|No. of Stopbits
|1/2
|Configures  the serial communication to use 1 stop bit, which is a common setting ensuring the end of each byte is clearly marked.
|}  


'''Modbus Protocol: TCP'''
=== 6.3 Port Configuration ===


[[File:Modbus Protocol- TCP.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
 
Serial port configuration involves setting parameters for serial communication, allowing data exchange between devices via serial ports.
 
Port Configuration is divided into 4 port mode,
 
'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client'''
 
'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server'''
 
'''Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave'''
 
'''Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Port config.png|1024x1024px]]'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|
|SN
|
|Field  Name
|'''Modbus protocol: TCP'''
|Sample  Value
|
|Description
|-
|-
|1
|1
|DEVICE NAME
|Port Mode
|Ex: Invendis
|Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client
|This is the  name assigned to the Modbus device for identification purposes.
|Configures  the serial port to send data directly to a remote TCP client without any additional protocol layers, making it "transparent."
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Modbus Comm IP
|Transparent Serial Port Mode
|Ex: 192.168.10.147
|1.) raw
|IP of the device you  are communicating with.
 
|-
2.) rawlp
|3
|Modbus Comm Port
|Ex: 502 (default)


|Give a specified TCP port number
3.) telnet
|-
 
4.) off
|1.) It's a straightforward data transfer where the serial data is sent as-is.
 
2.)  "Rawlp" stands for "raw with local processing". Typically,  it involves some minimal local processing before transmission.
 
3.) This  allows the serial connection to be accessed and managed over a Telnet  session.
 
4.) The  "off" mode disables the transparent serial port functionality.
|-
|3
|Time Out
|no time out
|Ensures that  the serial port does not time out, meaning it will continuously wait for data  without closing the connection due to inactivity.
|-
|4
|4
|Modbus Comm Timeout
|Local Listener TCP Port
|Ex: 60
|3040
|This refers to the maximum amount of time the master device will wait for a response from a slave device before it assumes a communication failure.
|Sets the TCP port number to 3040 for the local listener to accept incoming TCP connections.
|-
|-
|5
|5
|Meter ID
|Baud Rate
|1
|9600
|The Meter ID  is a unique identifier for the specific meter within the network. Each Modbus  device on the network must have a unique ID to differentiate it from others.
|This is a common baud rate for serial communication, balancing speed and reliability.
|-
|-
|6
|6
|Meter Model
|No Of Stopbits
|Example: abcd
|1
|This field specifies the model of the meter.
|Configures the serial communication to use 1 stop bit, which is a common setting  ensuring the end of each byte is clearly marked.
|-
|-
|7
|7
|Slave Address
|No Of Databits
|Example: '''1'''
|8
|The slave  address identifies the specific slave device on the Modbus network. Each slave must have a unique address so that the master can communicate with it  individually.
|Sets the  number of bits in each transmitted byte to 8.
|}
|-
'''Block Config:'''
|8
|Parity
|1.) None


[[File:Block Config.png|frameless|620x620px]]
2.) Even


3.) Odd


Specification details are given below:
4.) Space
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Funtion Code
|read coils (1)


read input coils (2)
5.) Mark
|1.) No parity  bit is added to the data byte.


read holding registers (3)
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.


read  input registers (4)
3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
|The function code indicates the operation to be performed. In Modbus, each operation has a  specific function code.
|-
|2
|Start  Register
|Example: 0
|The start  register indicates the address of the first register to be read in the slave  device.
|-
|3
|Register  Count
|Example: 10
|This  specifies the number of consecutive registers to read starting from the start  register.
|}
Click on “Add Block” below to add another set of parameters.


4.) The  parity bit is always set to 0, regardless of the data.


'''Register Config:'''
5.) The  parity bit is always set to 1, regardless of the data.
 
|-
In this section you can add multiple parameters to read in ‘Default Mapping’ & ‘Custom Mapping’ field.  
|9
|Flow Control
|1.) RTSCTS
 
2.) NONE
 
3.) DTRDSR
 
4.) XONXOFF
|1.) Request  to Send / Clear to Send
 
2.) No flow  control is used.
 
3.) Data  Terminal Ready / Data Set Ready
 
4.) Software  flow control using specific control characters (XON and XOFF) to manage data  flow.
|-
|10
|Read Trace
|Enable/Disable
|Enables  logging of data being read from the serial port.
|-
|11
|Write Trace
|Enable/Disable
|Enables  logging of data being written to the serial port.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes are made.


[[File:Register Config V2.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
 
'''Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server:'''
 
Configures the port to act as a bridge, converting serial data into TCP packets sent to a remote TCP server.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Transparent serial-tcp server.png|1024x1024px]]  


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
Line 4,058: Line 4,311:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Default  mapping
|Port Mode
|1.) Tag Name = (Ex: FQ)
|Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server
 
|Defines how the serial port will operate in relation to the remote server.
2.) Data type  = Hexadecimal; Floating point | Floating point (Swapped Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first | 16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT, high byte first | 16bit UINT, low byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1) | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit INT (byte order  4,3,2,1)
|-
|1.) Input value name.
|2
 
|Remote Server IP
2.) Defines how read data will be stored.
|Ex: 192.168.10.1
|'''Field must not be empty:''' This is a required field, and you must provide a valid IP  address for proper communication.
|-
|3
|Remote Server Port
|Ex: 1883
|'''Field must not be empty:''' This is a required field, and you must specify the correct  port number used by the server.
|-
|-
|2
|4
|Custom mapping
|Transparent Serial Port Mode
|1.) Register name:
|1.) raw


2.) Start register:
2.) rawlp


3.) Register count:
3.) telnet


4.) Data type = Hexadecimal;  Floating point | Floating point (Swapped Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first |  16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT, high byte first | 16bit UINT, low  byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1)  | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit INT (byte order 4,3,2,1); 1 bit
4.) off
|1.)  Input value name.
|1.) It's a straightforward data transfer where the serial data is sent as-is.


2.)  First register in custom register block.
2.)  "Rawlp" stands for "raw with local processing". Typically,  it involves some minimal local processing before transmission.


3.) Path to file in which the custom register block will be stored.
3.) This allows the serial connection to be accessed and managed over a Telnet  session.


4.) Defines how read data will be  stored.
4.) The  "off" mode disables the transparent serial port functionality.
|}
|-
In Register Config,
|5
 
|Time Out
Click on ‘Add’ to add new parameters.
|no time out
 
|Ensures that  the serial port does not time out, meaning it will continuously wait for data without closing the connection due to inactivity.
Click on ‘Show JSON’ to view an example value of how the data will be presented.
|-
|6
|Local Listener Interface IP Address
|
|'''Field must  not be empty:''' This is a required field for specifying which local IP  address will be used for listening.
|-
|7
|Local Listener TCP Port
|3040
|The TCP port number on the local device that will be used to listen for incoming data.
|-
|
|
|
|
|-
|8
|Baud Rate
|9600
|Standard baud  rate, common for many serial devices.
|-
|9
|No Of Stopbits
|1
|Indicates  that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
|-
|10
|No Of Databits
|8
|Indicates  that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
|-
|11
|Parity
|1.) None


Click on ‘Update Device’ once configuration changes have been made.
2.) Even


'''Alarm/Event Config:'''
3.) Odd


[[File:Alarm-Event Config.png|frameless|620x620px]]
4.) Space


Specification details are given below:
5.) Mark
{| class="wikitable"
|1.) No parity  bit is added to the data byte.
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Category
|1.) Alarm


2.) Event
2.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.
|'''Alarm''': Specifies that the configuration is for an alarm, which typically triggers  when certain conditions are met.


'''Event''': Specifies that the configuration is for an event, which might log information  or trigger actions without necessarily being an alarm.
3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
|-
|2
|Status
|1.) Enabled


2.) Disabled
4.) The parity bit is always set to 0, regardless of the data.
|'''Enabled''': Activates the alarm or event, making it operational.


'''Disabled''': Deactivates the alarm or event, making it non-operational.
5.) The parity bit is always set to 1, regardless of the data.
|-
|-
|3
|12
|Name
|Flow Control
|Ex: vtg
|1.) RTSCTS
|The name or  identifier for the alarm/event.
 
|-
2.) NONE
|4
|Function code
|read coils (1)


read input coils (2)
3.) DTRDSR


read holding registers (3)
4.) XONXOFF
|1.) Request  to Send / Clear to Send


read input registers (4)
2.) No flow  control is used.
|These function codes are typically based on the Modbus protocol, indicating what type of data is being monitored.
 
3.) Data Terminal Ready / Data Set Ready
 
4.) Software flow control using specific control characters (XON and XOFF) to manage data flow.
|-
|-
|5
|13
|Start Register
|Read Trace
|Ex: 0
|Enable/Disable
|The address of the first register to monitor.
|Option to enable tracing of incoming data from the serial port, useful for debugging.
|-
|-
|6
|14
|No_of Reg
|Write Trace
|Ex: 10
|Enable/Disable
|The number of consecutive registers to monitor from the starting register.
|Option to enable  tracing of outgoing data from the serial port, useful for debugging.
|-
|}
|7
Click on save once configuration changes are made.
|Data Type
 
|<nowiki>Hexadecimal; Floating point | Floating point (Swapped  Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first | 16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT,  high byte first | 16bit UINT, low byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4)  | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1) | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit  INT (byte order 4,3,2,1); Boolean</nowiki>
 
|Provides  options for the type of data being monitored, such as integer, float,  Boolean, etc.
 
|-
'''Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave:'''
|8
 
|Upper Thresh/
Configures the serial port to function as a Modbus TCP Master that communicates with a Modbus RTU Slave over the serial connection.
 
This setup is used to send Modbus TCP commands to a Modbus RTU device via a serial-to-TCP gateway.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Modbus tcp master.png|1024x1024px]]


Alarm Value
Specification details are given below:
|Ex: 2
{| class="wikitable"
|The value at which the alarm is triggered if the monitored parameter exceeds this upper threshold.
|SN
|-
|Field Name
|9
|Sample Value
|Upper Hys
|Description
|Ex: 2
|-
|This value is  subtracted from the upper threshold to set the point at which the alarm resets, preventing rapid toggling.
|1
|Port Mode
|Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave
|This setup is  used to send Modbus TCP commands to a Modbus RTU device via a serial-to-TCP gateway.
|-
|-
|10
|2
|Lower Thresh
|Baud Rate
|Ex: 2
|9600
|The value at  which the alarm is triggered if the monitored parameter falls below this  lower threshold.
|The speed at  which data is transmitted over the serial connection.
|-
|-
|11
|3
|Lower Hys
|Parity
|Ex: 1
|1.) None
|This value is  added to the lower threshold to set the point at which the alarm resets,  preventing rapid toggling.
|}
Click on “Add Alarm” to add another Alarm/Event.


Click on ‘Show JSON’ to view an example value of how the data will be presented.
2.) Even


Click on ‘Add Device’ once configuration changes have been made.
3.) Odd
|1.) No parity  bit is used, meaning no additional error-checking bits are included.


= 7. Appmanager =
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.
'''Appmanager''' is a system utility that manages the installation, configuration, and execution of software applications on a device.


This section is divided into 8 categories,
3.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
 
|-
* Application Start/Stop
|4
* Application Software Upgrade
|No of Stopbits
* Modbus Utility Configuration
|1
* Import/Export Application Configurations
|Indicates  that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
* App Health Status
* IO Utilities
 
[[File:GRD44B-5R Application Manager Dashboard.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
=== 7.1 Application Start/Stop ===
All changes made in ‘'''Configuration’''' section should be saved into backend and to do that navigate to Appmanager>> Application Start/Stop.
 
Click on update to save all the changes made in configuration section.
 
Once updated click on start.
 
[[File:Application Start-Stop Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
Make sure application is started to send data to cloud, once started it can be seen start option is replaced by Stop as shown above.
 
=== 7.2 Application Software Upgrade ===
In this section you can upgrade software manually or automatically.
 
For auto upgrade, enable auto upgrade tab,
 
This is further divided into 2 sections,
 
Client and server settings
 
Auto Upgrade Interval
 
[[File:Application Software Upgrade.png|frameless|620x620px]]
 
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
| colspan="4" |Client and Server Settings
|-
|-
|SN
|5
|Field  Name
|No of Databits
|Sample  Value
|8
|Description
|Indicates  that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
|-
|-
|1
|6
|Authentication
|Local Listener Interface IP Address
|Enable/Disable
|
|Enable if username/password is required.
|'''Field must not be empty:''' You need to provide a valid IP address where the TCP  connections will be received.
|-
|-
|2
|7
|Username
|TCP Port
|XXXX
|502
|The username  required to authenticate with the server.
|This is the  standard port for Modbus TCP communication.
|-
|3
|Password
|XXXX
|The password  required to authenticate with the server.
|-
|4
|Server address
|<nowiki>ftp://XXXX</nowiki>
|The URL or IP  address of the server where the upgrade files are located.
|-
|-
|8
|Max. Number of Retries
|5
|5
|Connection  timeout
|The maximum  number of times to retry sending a request if the initial attempt fails.
|Ex: 180
|The maximum  time (in seconds) the system will wait to establish a connection with the server before timing out.
|-
|-
|6
|9
|Operation  timeout
|Delay Between Each Request (In milliseconds)
|Ex: 240
|500
|The maximum time (in seconds) the system will wait for the upgrade operation to complete before timing out.
|The delay between consecutive Modbus requests to avoid overwhelming the system or device.
|-
|-
| colspan="4" |'''Auto Upgrade Interval'''
|10
|Response Wait Time (In milliseconds)
|500
|The maximum  time to wait for a response from the Modbus RTU Slave before considering the  request failed.
|-
|11
|Connection Timeout (In seconds)
|0
|A value of 0  typically means no timeout is set, so the system will wait indefinitely.
|-
|-
|12
|Inactivity Timeout (In seconds)
|
|The time to  wait before closing a connection if no activity is detected.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.
'''Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave:'''
Configures the serial port to function as a Modbus RTU Master that communicates with a Modbus TCP Slave over a network. This setup is used to send Modbus RTU commands from a master device to a Modbus TCP device via a TCP-to-serial gateway.
[[File:GRD44B 5R Modbus rtu master.png|1024x1024px]]
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
|Field  Name
|Field  Name
Line 4,265: Line 4,528:
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Minutes
|Port Mode
|Example: 56
|Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave
|Set the minute part of the interval when the auto-upgrade check will occur
|This setup is used to send Modbus RTU commands from a master device to a Modbus TCP device  via a TCP-to-serial gateway.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|Day Of Month
|Baud Rate
|Example: all
|9600
|Specifies the days of the month when the auto-upgrade check should occur.
|The speed at which data is transmitted over the serial connection.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Month
|Parity
|Example: all
|1.) None
|Specifies the  months during which the auto-upgrade check should occur
 
|-
2.) Even
|4
 
|Day Of Week
3.) Odd
|Example: all
|1.) No parity bit is used, meaning no additional error-checking bits are included.
|Specifies the days of the week when the auto-upgrade check should occur.
|}
You can also check the current software version and manually upgrade software as shown below.


To Manually upgrade Application,
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.


Enter the correct ‘Checksum’ and ‘Size’ and upgrade the page.
3.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
 
|-
'''(Please stop the applications before upgrading)'''
|4
 
|No of Stopbits
[[File:Manual Upgrade Application.png|frameless|620x620px]]
|1
 
|Indicates  that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
=== 7.3 Modbus Utility Configuration ===
|-
Any changes to be made in Modbus Configuration to test can be made in Modbus Utility Configuration without disturbing the actual Modbus Configuration.
|5
 
|No of Databits
The working process of ‘Modbus Configuration’ and ‘Modbus Utility Configuration’ are same.
|8
 
|Indicates  that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
Refer  (6.5 Modbus Configuration) for specification details.
|-
 
|6
[[File:Modbus Utility Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
|TCP Slave Address
 
|Field must not be empty
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.
|The IP  address of the Modbus TCP Slave device to which the master will send requests.
 
|-
=== 7.4 Import / Export Gateway Configuration ===
|7
This functionality ensures that you can easily manage, back up, and restore device gateway
|TCP Slave Port
 
|Field must not be empty
configurations, as well as reset the device to default settings when needed.
|The port  number on the Modbus TCP Slave device for receiving Modbus requests.
 
|-
[[File:Import - Export Gateway Configuration.png|frameless|620x620px]]
|8
|Max. Number of Retries
|5
|The maximum  number of times to retry sending a request if the initial attempt fails.
|-
|9
|Delay Between Each Request (In milliseconds)
|Field must not be empty
|The delay  between consecutive Modbus requests to avoid overwhelming the system.
|-
|10
|Response Wait Time (In milliseconds)
|500
|The maximum  time to wait for a response from the Modbus TCP Slave before considering the  request failed.
|-
|11
|Connection Timeout (In seconds)
|0
|A value of 0  typically means no timeout is set, so the system will wait indefinitely.
|-
|12
|Inactivity Timeout (In seconds)
|Field must not be empty
|The time to wait before closing a connection if no activity is detected.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.  


=== 6.4 Cloud Configuration ===
In this section you can select the protocol by which you need to send data to cloud.


'''Export Config:'''
There are 3 Cloud/Protocol available,


'''Usage:''' Click the "Export Config" button to save the current configuration to a file.
'''HTTP'''


'''MQTT'''


'''Import Config:'''
'''Azure'''


'''Usage:''' Click the "Import Config" button and select the text file containing the configuration you want to import.
[[File:GRD44B 5R Cloud config.png|1024x1024px]]'''HTTP Cloud/Protocol:'''


This configuration sets up communication between your device and cloud service using the HTTP cloud.


'''Reset Config''':
[[File:GRD44B 5R Http CLOUD-PROTOCOL.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
 
{| class="wikitable"
'''Usage''': Click the "Reset Config" button to revert the device to its default configuration settings.
|SN
 
|Field  Name
=== 7.5 App Health Status ===
|Sample  Value
This section provides utilities to check the health and status of various applications and data inputs
|Description
 
|-
within the system. It allows monitoring of the last data produced and sent times for different utilities, as
|1
|Site ID
|Ex: ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’.
|A unique  identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
|-
|2
|Cloud / Protocol
|HTTP
|The protocol  used for communication with the cloud service.
|-
|3
|HTTP URL
|'''Example:''' www.httpbin.org/post
|The endpoint  URL of the cloud service where data will be sent.
|-
|4
|HTTP Port (Optional)
|Leave it blank for the default port.
|The port  number for the HTTP connection. This is optional because the default port for  HTTP (80) is used if not specified.
|-
|5
|Enable Authentication
|Enable/Disable
|Enable this  if your cloud service requires a username and password.
|-
|6
|Username
|'''Example:''' admin
|The username  for authentication with the cloud service.
|-
|7
|Password
|*****
|The password  for authentication with the cloud service.
|-
|8
|Enable Server Response Validation
|Enable/Disable
|Enable this  if you need to verify that the server's response is valid.
|-
|9
|Server Response
|Ex: RecordID or custom
|A unique  identifier for the record being sent to the cloud service.
|-
|10
|Method
|1.) Post
 
2.) Get
|1.) The HTTP  method used for sending data to the cloud service.


well as the running status of applications.
2.) The HTTP  method used for requesting data from the cloud service.
|}


[[File:App Health Status 1.png|frameless|620x620px]]
'''MQTT Cloud/Protocol:'''


This configuration sets up communication between your device and a cloud service using the MQTT protocol.


[[File:GRD44B 5R MQTT.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Site ID
|Example:  ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’.
|A unique  identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
|-
|2
|Cloud / Protocol
|MQTT
|The protocol  used for communication with the cloud service.
|-
|3
|MQTT Host
|'''Example:''' broker.hivemq.com
|The MQTT  broker's address (hostname or IP address) that the device will connect to for  sending and receiving messages.
|-
|4
|MQTT Port
|'''Example:''' 1883
|This is the  default port for unencrypted MQTT connections.
|-
|5
|Authentication Mode
|1.) No Authentication
2.) Username/Password
3.) TLS
|1.) Connect  to the broker without any credentials.
2.) The  Username/Password for authentication with the cloud service.
3.) Upload  TLS certificates only if TLS authentication is selected as shown in the above  image.
|-
|6
|Enable Publish Over LAN
|Enable/Disable
|When enabled,  the device will also publish MQTT messages over the local area network (LAN).
|-
|7
|RS485 Topic (Optional)
|'''Example:''' RS485Data1
|The MQTT  topic for publishing RS485 data.
|-
|8
|Command Request Topic (Optional)
|'''Example:''' CommandRequest1
|The topic to  which the device listens for command requests. Leave it blank if not in use.
|-
|9
|Command Response Topic (Optional)
|'''Example:''' CommandResponse1
|The topic on  which the device publishes responses to commands. Leave it blank if not in  use.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.
'''Azure:'''
This configuration sets up the connection to Azure IoT Hub using either MQTT or HTTP protocols with a specified connection string.
[[File:GRD44B 5R Azure.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Site ID
|Example:  ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’.
|A unique  identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
|-
|2
|Cloud / Protocol
|Azure
|The cloud  service and protocol used for communication.
|-
|3
|Protocol
|1.) MQTT
2.) HTTP
|1.) A  lightweight messaging protocol suitable for IoT devices.
2.) A  protocol used for communication over the web, commonly used for RESTful  services.
|-
|4
|Connection String
|e.g., invendis-iot-hub.azure-devices.net.
|The primary  or secondary key used to authenticate the device with the IoT Hub.
|}
Click on save once configuration changes have been made.
=== 6.5 Modbus Configuration ===
Modbus Configuration involves setting up communication parameters for Modbus devices, including baud rate, parity, stop bits, data bits, TCP/RTU settings, and timeout/retry settings for reliable data exchange.
Click on “Add Device” to start a new configuration.
This Configuration has 4 sections,
1.) Parameter Configuration
2.) Block Config
3.) Register Config
4.) Alarm/Event Config
[[File:GRD44B 5R Modbus config.png|1024x1024px]]
'''Parameter Configuration:'''
As shown in the image below, there are two types of protocol used in Modbus configuration.
1.) RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)
2.) TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
Details of both protocols is mentioned in the specification table.
'''Modbus Protocol: RTU'''
[[File:GRD44B 5R Parameter config.png|1024x1024px]]


Specification details are given below:
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|
|Field  Name
|
|Sample  Value
|'''Modbus protocol: RTU'''
|Description
|
|-
|-
|1
|1
|Energymeter  Last Data Produced Time
|DEVICE NAME
|Command  ‘Read’
|Ex: Invendis
|Displays the  last time data was produced by the energymeter.
|This is the  name assigned to the Modbus device for identification purposes.
|-
|-
|2
|2
|DIO Last Data  Produced Time
|Baud rate
|Command  ‘Read’
|<nowiki>300 | 1200 | 1800 | 2400 | 4800 | 19200 |  38400 | default: 9600</nowiki>
|Displays the  last time data was produced by the digital input/output system.
|The baud rate determines the communication  speed between devices, measured in bits per second.
|-
|-
|3
|3
|Energymeter  Last Data Sent Time
|Parity
|Command  ‘Read’
|1.) NONE
|Displays the  last time data from the energymeter was sent.
 
|-
2.) ODD
|4
 
|App Running  Status
3.) EVEN
|Command  ‘Read’
|1.) No parity  bit is added to the data byte.
|Displays the  current running status of applications.
 
|-
2.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in
|5
 
|Download  Files
the data byte  plus the parity bit is even.
|Command  ‘Download’
 
|Choose the  desired option from the dropdown menu.
3.) Ensures  that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.
|-
|4
|Meter ID
|1
|The Meter ID  is a unique identifier for the specific meter within the network. Each Modbus  device on the network must have a unique ID to differentiate it from others.
|-
|5
|Meter Model
|Example: abcd
|This field  specifies the model of the meter.
|-
|6
|Port number
|RS485 Port-1
|This  specifies which RS485 port on the device is being used for communication.
|-
|7
|Slave Address
|Example: '''1'''
|The slave  address identifies the specific slave device on the Modbus network. Each  slave must have a unique address so that the master can communicate with it  individually.
|-
|8
|No. of Databits
|7/8
|Indicates  that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
|-
|9
|No. of Stopbits
|1/2
|Configures  the serial communication to use 1 stop bit, which is a common setting  ensuring the end of each byte is clearly marked.
|}
 
'''Modbus Protocol: TCP'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Parameter config 1.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|
|
|'''Modbus protocol: TCP'''
|
|-
|1
|DEVICE NAME
|Ex: Invendis
|This is the  name assigned to the Modbus device for identification purposes.
|-
|2
|Modbus Comm IP
|Ex: 192.168.10.147
|IP of the device you  are communicating with.
|-
|3
|Modbus Comm Port
|Ex: 502 (default)
 
|Give a specified TCP port number
|-
|4
|Modbus Comm Timeout
|Ex: 60
|This refers  to the maximum amount of time the master device will wait for a response from  a slave device before it assumes a communication failure.
|-
|5
|Meter ID
|1
|The Meter ID  is a unique identifier for the specific meter within the network. Each Modbus  device on the network must have a unique ID to differentiate it from others.
|-
|6
|Meter Model
|Example: abcd
|This field  specifies the model of the meter.
|-
|7
|Slave Address
|Example: '''1'''
|The slave  address identifies the specific slave device on the Modbus network. Each  slave must have a unique address so that the master can communicate with it  individually.
|}
 
 
 
'''Block Config:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Block config.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Funtion Code
|read coils (1)
 
read input coils (2)
 
read holding registers (3)
 
read  input registers (4)
|The function  code indicates the operation to be performed. In Modbus, each operation has a  specific function code.
|-
|2
|Start  Register
|Example: 0
|The start  register indicates the address of the first register to be read in the slave  device.
|-
|3
|Register  Count
|Example: 10
|This  specifies the number of consecutive registers to read starting from the start  register.
|}
Click on “Add Block” below to add another set of parameters.
 
 
 
'''Register Config:'''
 
In this section you can add multiple parameters to read in ‘Default Mapping’ & ‘Custom Mapping’ field.
 
 
 
''*Refer the image below*''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Register config.png|1024x1024px]]
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Default  mapping
|1.) Tag Name = (Ex: FQ)
 
2.) Data type  = Hexadecimal; Floating point | Floating point (Swapped Byte) | 16bit INT,  high byte first | 16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT, high byte first |  16bit UINT, low byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit UINT  (byte order 4,3,2,1) | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit INT (byte order  4,3,2,1)
|1.) Input value name.
 
2.) Defines  how read data will be stored.
|-
|2
|Custom mapping
|1.)  Register name:
 
2.)  Start register:
 
3.)  Register count:
 
4.) Data type = Hexadecimal;  Floating point | Floating point (Swapped Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first |  16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT, high byte first | 16bit UINT, low  byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1)  | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit INT (byte order 4,3,2,1); 1 bit
|1.)  Input value name.
 
2.)  First register in custom register block.
 
3.) Path  to file in which the custom register block will be stored.
 
4.) Defines how read data will be  stored.
|}
 
 
 
In Register Config,
 
Click on ‘Add’ to add new parameters.
 
Click on ‘Show JSON’ to view an example value of how the data will be presented.
 
Click on ‘Add Device’ once configuration changes have been made.
 
'''Alarm/Event Config:'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Alarm-event config.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Category
|1.) Alarm
 
2.) Event
|'''Alarm''':  Specifies that the configuration is for an alarm, which typically triggers  when certain conditions are met.
 
'''Event''':  Specifies that the configuration is for an event, which might log information  or trigger actions without necessarily being an alarm.
|-
|2
|Status
|1.) Enabled
 
2.) Disabled
|'''Enabled''':  Activates the alarm or event, making it operational.
 
'''Disabled''':  Deactivates the alarm or event, making it non-operational.
|-
|3
|Name
|Ex: vtg
|The name or  identifier for the alarm/event.
|-
|4
|Function code
|read coils (1)
 
read input coils (2)
 
read holding registers (3)
 
read  input registers (4)
|These  function codes are typically based on the Modbus protocol, indicating what  type of data is being monitored.
|-
|5
|Start Register
|Ex: 0
|The address  of the first register to monitor.
|-
|6
|No_of Reg
|Ex: 10
|The number of  consecutive registers to monitor from the starting register.
|-
|7
|Data Type
|<nowiki>Hexadecimal; Floating point | Floating point (Swapped  Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first | 16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT,  high byte first | 16bit UINT, low byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4)  | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1) | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit  INT (byte order 4,3,2,1); Boolean</nowiki>
|Provides  options for the type of data being monitored, such as integer, float,  Boolean, etc.
|-
|8
|Upper Thresh/
 
Alarm Value
|Ex: 2
|The value at  which the alarm is triggered if the monitored parameter exceeds this upper  threshold.
|-
|9
|Upper Hys
|Ex: 2
|This value is  subtracted from the upper threshold to set the point at which the alarm  resets, preventing rapid toggling.
|-
|10
|Lower Thresh
|Ex: 2
|The value at  which the alarm is triggered if the monitored parameter falls below this  lower threshold.
|-
|11
|Lower Hys
|Ex: 1
|This value is  added to the lower threshold to set the point at which the alarm resets,  preventing rapid toggling.
|}
Click on “Add Alarm” to add another Alarm/Event.
 
Click on ‘Show JSON’ to view an example value of how the data will be presented.
 
Click on ‘Add Device’ once configuration changes have been made.
 
== 7. Appmanager ==
'''Appmanager''' is a system utility that manages the installation, configuration, and execution of software applications on a device.
 
This section is divided into 6 categories,
 
* Application Start/Stop
* Application Software Upgrade
* Modbus Utility Configuration
* Import/Export Application Configurations
* App Health Status
* IO Utilities
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Appmanager.png|1024x1024px]]
=== 7.1 Application Start/Stop ===
All changes made in ‘'''Configuration’''' section should be saved into backend and to do that navigate to Appmanager >> Application Start/Stop.
 
Click on update to save all the changes made in configuration section.
 
Once updated click on start.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R App start-stop.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Make sure application is started to send data to cloud, once started it can be seen start option is replaced by Stop as shown above.
 
=== 7.2 Application Software Upgrade ===
In this section you can upgrade software manually or automatically.
 
For auto upgrade, enable auto upgrade tab,
 
This is further divided into 2 sections,
 
'''Client and server settings'''
 
'''Auto Upgrade Interval'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Software upgrade.png|1024x1024px]]
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
| colspan="4" |'''Client  and server settings'''
|-
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Authentication
|Enable/Disable
|Enable if  username/password is required.
|-
|2
|Username
|XXXX
|The username  required to authenticate with the server.
|-
|3
|Password
|XXXX
|The password  required to authenticate with the server.
|-
|4
|Server  address
|<nowiki>ftp://XXXX</nowiki>
|The URL or IP  address of the server where the upgrade files are located.
|-
|5
|Connection  timeout
|Ex: 180
|The maximum  time (in seconds) the system will wait to establish a connection with the  server before timing out.
|-
|6
|Operation  timeout
|Ex: 240
|The maximum  time (in seconds) the system will wait for the upgrade operation to complete before  timing out.
|-
| colspan="4" |'''Auto Upgrade Interval'''
|-
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Minutes
|Example: 56
|Set the  minute part of the interval when the auto-upgrade check will occur
|-
|2
|Day Of Month
|Example: all
|Specifies the  days of the month when the auto-upgrade check should occur.
|-
|3
|Month
|Example: all
|Specifies the  months during which the auto-upgrade check should occur
|-
|4
|Day Of Week
|Example: all
|Specifies the  days of the week when the auto-upgrade check should occur.
|}
You can also check the current software version and manually upgrade software as shown below.
 
 
 
To Manually upgrade Application,
 
Enter the correct ‘Checksum’ and ‘Size’ and upgrade the page.
 
'''(Please stop the applications before upgrading)'''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Software upgrade 1.png|1024x1024px]]
 
=== 7.3 Modbus Utility Configuration ===
Any changes to be made in Modbus Configuration to test can be made in Modbus Utility Configuration without disturbing the actual Modbus Configuration.
 
The working process of ‘Modbus Configuration’ and ‘Modbus Utility Configuration’ are same.
 
Refer (6.5 Modbus Configuration) for specification details.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Modbus utility config.png|1024x1024px]]Click on save once configuration changes have been made.
 
=== 7.4 Import / Export Gateway Configuration ===
This functionality ensures that you can easily manage, back up, and restore device gateway
 
configurations, as well as reset the device to default settings when needed.
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R Gateway import-export.png|1024x1024px]]
 
'''Export Config:'''
 
'''Usage:''' Click the "Export Config" button to save the current configuration to a file.
 
 
 
'''Import Config:'''
 
'''Usage:''' Click the "Import Config" button and select the text file containing the configuration you want to import.
 
 
 
'''Reset Config''':
 
'''Usage''': Click the "Reset Config" button to revert the device to its default configuration settings.
 
=== 7.5 App Health Status ===
This section provides utilities to check the health and status of various applications and data inputs
 
within the system. It allows monitoring of the last data produced and sent times for different utilities, as
 
well as the running status of applications.
 
''*Refer the image below*''
 
[[File:GRD44B 5R App health status.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|Field  Name
|Sample  Value
|Description
|-
|1
|Energymeter  Last Data Produced Time
|Command  ‘Read’
|Displays the  last time data was produced by the energymeter.
|-
|2
|DIO Last Data  Produced Time
|Command  ‘Read’
|Displays the  last time data was produced by the digital input/output system.
|-
|3
|Energymeter  Last Data Sent Time
|Command  ‘Read’
|Displays the  last time data from the energymeter was sent.
|-
|4
|App Running  Status
|Command  ‘Read’
|Displays the  current running status of applications.
|-
|5
|Download  Files
|Command  ‘Download’
|Choose the  desired option from the dropdown menu.
 
Download data  or logs related to the options available.
|-
|6
|Output
|Display Value
|Provides  output or feedback based on selected utilities.
|}
 
 
 
=== 7.6 IO Utilities ===
This section provides output of various utilities connected to the device.
 
This section exactly shows whether the connection made is successful or not.


Download data  or logs related to the options available.
|-
|6
|Output
|Display Value
|Provides  output or feedback based on selected utilities.
|}


=== 7.6 IO Utilities ===
This section provides output of various utilities connected to the device.


This section exactly shows whether the connection made is successful or not.
''*Refer the image below*''


[[File:IO Utilities 1.png|frameless|620x620px]]
[[File:GRD44B 5R IO Utilities.png|1024x1024px]]Specification details are given below:
 
Specification details are given below:
{| class="wikitable"
{| class="wikitable"
|SN
|SN
Line 4,403: Line 5,325:
|}
|}


= 8.Logout =
== 8.Logout ==
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.


[[File:Logout.png|frameless|620x620px]]
[[File:GRD44_3_Logout.png|1024x1024px]]

Latest revision as of 10:58, 7 January 2025


Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop)       

To log in to SILBO_GRD44B-5R by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below.

Connecting via LAN:

Connect your laptop's LAN port to one of the router's LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are 4 available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used.

                                                                                                                                     

How to connect with the SILBO_ GRD44B-5R application

Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop

Please open the command prompt and ping to get the IP config of that device.

Type the command Ipconfig

It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.

Log In

Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.

It will show the log in page of the application.

Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.

Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.

       

The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.

The application is divided in to 8 Modules.

  • Info
  • Settings
  • Maintenance
  • Status
  • Features
  • Configuration
  • Appmanager
  • Logout

1. Info

The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.

It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.

It has 3 submodules.

  • Overview
  • System Log
  • Kernel Log

1.1 Overview

In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.

System:

In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.

The specifications details are as follows,

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Hostname 45A27240005 This field displays the router serial number of the device
2 Model Silbo_GRD44B-5R_GW-EC200A This field displays the model number of the device
3 Firmware Version and IPK Version 1.17_1.15 This field displays the firmware version and IPK version
4 Application Firmware version and IPK version 1.03_1.13 This field displays the software version of the device.
5 Kernel Version 4.14.180 This field displays the kernel version of the device
6 Local Time Wednesday, December 18, 2024 at 12:56:00 PM This field displays the local time
7 Uptime 5h 27m 5s This field displays the uptime of the device
8 Load Average 0.31 0.27 0.19 This field displays the average load

Memory:

In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.

The specifications details are as follows.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Total Available 57716 kB / 124188 kB (46%) This field displays the total availability of memory space in the device
2 Free 46424 kB / 124188 kB (37%) This field displays the Free memory space in the device
3 Cached 444 kB / 124188 kB (0%) This field displays the Cached memory space in the device
4 Buffered 11224 kB / 124188 kB (9%) This field displays the Buffered memory space in the device


Storage:

In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.


The specifications details are as follows.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Root Usage 1580 kB / 12800 kB (12%) This field displays the total root usage of the device
2 Temporary Usage 444 kB / 62092 kB (0%) This field displays the total temporary usage of the device

Network:

In this section you can monitor IPv4 WAN status.

The specifications details are as follows.

SN Field Name Sample value Description
1 Type DHCP client A DHCP client is a device or software that requests and receives configuration information from a DHCP server, such as an IP address, gateway, and DNS servers.
2 Connected 1h 49m 8s This indicates the duration for which the device has been connected to the network.
3 Address 10.62.35.111 This is the IP address assigned to the DHCP client by the DHCP server. It uniquely identifies the device on the network.
4 Gateway 10.62.35.144 The gateway (or default gateway) is the IP address of the network device that routes traffic from the local network to other networks.
5 DNS 8.8.8.8, 10.103.81.232 The first DNS server "8.8.8.8" is a public DNS server provided by Google.

The second DNS server "10.103.81.232" is a private DNS server.

Active SIM Information:

This section displays SIM details only when the SIM card is active.

Connection Tracking:

In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.

The specifications details are as follows.

SN Field Value Sample Value Description
1 Active Connections 48/16384 (0%) This field displays the active connection of the device.

DHCP Leases:

In this section it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.

The specifications details are below.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Host Name KermaniK-LT This field displays the configured Host Name/Username for that device.
2 IPv4-Address 192.168.10.147 This field displays the IP address of the device.
3 MAC-Address 34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a This field displays the MAC-Address of the device.
4 Lease time remaining 11h 53m 49s This field displays the lease time remaining for the device.

1.2 System Log

This page provides on screen System logging information. In this page the user gets to view the system logs.

1.3 Kernel Log

This page provides on screen Kernel logging information.

In this page the user gets to view the Kernel logs.


2. Setting

In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.

IT consist of 8 submodules.

  • Network
  • VLAN
  • Sim Switch
  • Multi-WAN
  • VPN
  • Firewall
  • Loopback Rule
  • VRRP
  • Remote Monitoring
  • Tunnel

2.1 Network

In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.

Ethernet Setting:

In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.

For this device 5 ports are configured.

Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well.

Ethernet WAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP, Static and PPOE.

EDIT:

To add a new Interface, click on ‘Add’.

To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.

Once the changes are done click on the update button to save all the changes.

Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.

Specification details are given below:  Type: WAN

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Physical Device Ex: eth0.5 This indicates a network interface on which our network is connected. This setting is by default (Editable).
2 Type WAN/LAN This designates whether the interface is part of the WAN or LAN.

WAN: Connects the device to the internet.

LAN: Connects the device to the internal network.

                                                                    Protocol: Static
3 Static IP Address Ex: 192.168.1.10 The manually assigned IP address for the interface.
4 Static Netmask Ex: 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask corresponding to the IP address.
5 Static Gateway Ex: 192.168.1.1 The IP address of the gateway (router) that the interface will use to send traffic outside its own subnet.
                                                                    Protocol: DHCP
6 DHCP Gateway Ex: 10.1.1.1 The IP address of the DHCP server (often the same as the router or gateway).
                                                                    Protocol: PPPoE
7 Username Any Name The username provided by your ISP for PPPoE authentication.
8 Password ***** The password provided by your ISP for PPPoE authentication.
9 Access Concentrator Typically, the name of the ISP's PPPoE server.
10 Service Name Sometimes required by ISPs, this field specifies a particular service offered by the ISP.
11 Gateway Ex: 0.0.0.0 The IP address used as the default route.
12 MAC Address Ex: D0:93:95:B0:98:6B The hardware (MAC) address of the network interface. This is unique to every network device.
13 Override MAC Address Ex: D0:93:95:B0:98:6B This field allows you to manually set a different MAC address if needed.

If left blank, the default MAC address is used.

14 Create Firewall Zone Enable/Disable You can assign this interface to a particular firewall zone, which determines its access rules (e.g., WAN zone for internet traffic, LAN zone for internal traffic).
Advanced Settings: Enable/Disable
15 Broadcast Ex: 192.168.123.34 Broadcast address for the network, typically calculated based on the IP and subnet mask.
16 Override MTU Ex: 1500 MTU size controls the maximum packet size that can be sent over the network.

Default is usually 1500 bytes.

17 Delegate Enable/Disable If checked, it allows delegation of prefixes for IPv6, often left unchecked unless needed.
18 Force Link Enable/Disable Forces the interface to be up even if no physical link is detected.
19 IPv4 Route Table Enable/Disable This field is used to specify static routes for IPv4.
20 Table No. 254: Default main routing table.

100: Custom routing table for specific purposes.

Default Table (Main Table): Usually, there is a default routing table (often Table No. 254 or 255) where all the routes are stored by default.

Custom Table: You can specify a different table number if you are managing multiple routing policies (e.g., VoIP traffic, VPN traffic).


Type: LAN


Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Physical Device Ex: eth0.1 This is the network interface identifier.
2 Type WAN/LAN This designates whether the interface is part of the WAN or LAN.

WAN: Connects the device to the internet.

LAN: Connects the device to the internal network.

3 Protocol Static This means that the IP address, netmask, and other network settings are manually configured rather than being automatically assigned by a DHCP server.
4 IP Address Ex: 192.168.10.1 This is the static IP address assigned to the interface. It acts as the gateway IP address for devices connected to this LAN.
5 Static Netmask Ex: 255.255.255.0 This is the subnet mask for the network.
6 MAC Address Ex: D0:93:95:B0:98:6C This is the hardware (MAC) address of the network interface, which uniquely identifies this device on the network.
7 Override MAC Address This allows you to manually enter a different MAC address if needed.
8 Enable DNS Enable/Disable If this option is enabled, the interface will act as a DNS resolver for the devices on the LAN, using the specified DNS server.
9 DNS Server Address Ex: 8.8.8.8 This is the IP address of the DNS server that will be used by devices on the LAN to resolve domain names to IP addresses.

More than one DNS Address can be added.

10 Enable DHCP Server Enable/Disable If enabled, this setting allows the interface to function as a DHCP server, automatically assigning IP addresses to devices connected to the LAN.
11 DHCP Start Address 70 The DHCP server will begin assigning IP addresses starting from 192.168.10.70
12 DHCP Limit 100 This specifies the number of IP addresses the DHCP server can assign. Starting at 192.168.10.70 and with a limit of 100, the server can assign addresses up to 192.168.10.169.
13 Lease Time Duration Hours-(H)

Minutes-(M)

Seconds-(S)

Hours-(H): This indicates that the lease time for each IP address assignment is measured in hours.

Minutes-(M): This indicates that the lease time for each IP address assignment is measured in minutes.

Seconds-(S): This indicates that the lease time for each IP address assignment is measured in seconds.

14 Lease Time 12 The DHCP lease time is set to 12 hours. After this period, a device must renew its IP address lease with the DHCP server to continue using the assigned IP address.
15 Create Firewall Zone Enable/Disable You can assign this interface to a particular firewall zone, which determines its access rules (e.g., WAN zone for internet traffic, LAN zone for internal traffic).
16 Internet Over SW_LAN Enable/Disable Allow all outbound traffic from the LAN to the internet.
Advanced Settings: Enable/Disable
17 Broadcast Ex: 192.168.123.34 Broadcast address for the network, typically calculated based on the IP and subnet mask.
18 Override MTU Ex: 1500 MTU size controls the maximum packet size that can be sent over the network.

Default is usually 1500 bytes.

19 Delegate Enable/Disable If checked, it allows delegation of prefixes for IPv6, often left unchecked unless needed.
20 Force Link Enable/Disable Forces the interface to be up even if no physical link is detected.
21 IPv4 Route Table Enable/Disable This field is used to specify static routes for IPv4.

Save and Update once configuration changes have been made.

Relay Server:

A relay server typically functions in a network to forward requests (usually DHCP or DNS) from clients to

a designated server when the server is on a different network segment.


EDIT:

To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.

Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.

Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.


Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Interface 1.)   eth0.1

2.)   ra0

1) eth0.1 typically represents a VLAN where the relay will listen for client requests.

2) If your device is broadcasting a Wi-Fi network on the ra0 interface, any DHCP or DNS relay settings will apply to devices connected via this wireless interface.

2 Start IP Address Ex: 192.168.10.100 This is the beginning IP address of the range that will be leased out to clients.
3 End IP Address Ex: 192.168.10.150 An IP address that is in the same subnet as the Start IP Address and allows sufficient addresses to be leased.
4 Netmask Ex: 255.255.255.0 A valid subnet mask such as 255.255.255.0 (for a /24 network), or 255.255.0.0 (for a /16 network).
5 Lease Time For a 24-hour lease time, set this value to 86400. This is the amount of time that an IP address is assigned to a client before it needs to request a renewal from the DHCP server.

Save and update.


Cellular Setting:

In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.

Select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV6.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Cellular Enable Checkbox Check this box to enable cellular functionality.
2 Cellular Operation Mode 1.) Single Cellular with Dual Sim

2.) Single Cellular with Single SIM

1.) This mode allows you to use one cellular modem with two SIM cards.

2.) This mode allows you to use one cellular modem with single SIM card.

3 Cellular Modem 1 QuectelEC200A This field displays the modem name.
4 Choose SIM 1 APN Mode 1.) Auto

2.) Manual

1.) Choose Auto for regular SIM to detect APN name automatically.

2.) Choose manual to enter the APN settings manually in case of M2M SIM cards.

5 SIM 1 Access Point Name airtelgprs.com Enter the APN provided by your cellular service provider in case of M2M sim. For regular sim cards APN name will be displayed automatically.
6 SIM 1 PDP Type IPV4 Choose the PDP type, which is typically either IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the sim card.
7 SIM 1 Username Enter the username if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
8 SIM 1 Password Enter the password if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
9 SIM 1 Authentication Protocol None Choose the authentication protocol. Options typically include None, PAP, or CHAP.
10 SIM 1 MTU Ex: 1500 (a common MTU size) MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) defines the largest size of a data packet that can be transmitted over the network.
11 Choose SIM 2 APN Mode 1.) Auto

2.) Manual

1.) Choose Auto for regular SIM to detect APN name automatically.

2.) Choose manual to enter the APN settings manually in case of M2M SIM cards.

12 SIM 2 Access Point Name airtelgprs.com Enter the APN provided by your cellular service provider in case of M2M sim. For regular sim cards APN name will be displayed automatically.
13 SIM 2 PDP Type IPV4 Choose the PDP type, which is typically either IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the sim card.
14 SIM 2 Username Enter the username if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
15 SIM 2 Password Enter the password if required by the APN. Leave blank if not required.
16 SIM 2 Authentication Protocol None Choose the authentication protocol. Options typically include None, PAP, or CHAP.
17 SIM 2 MTU Ex: 1500 (a common MTU size) MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) defines the largest size of a data packet that can be transmitted over the network.
18 Primary SIM Switchback Enable Enable/Disable When enabled, the device will automatically switch back to the primary SIM (SIM 1) after switching to SIM 2, under certain conditions (e.g., SIM 1 regains network availability).
19 Primary SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes) 10 Enter the time in minutes after which the system should switch back to the primary SIM if it becomes available.


After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.


Band lock and Operator Lock:

In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider.

Bands available in the drop-down list.

2G/3G option:

2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV.

While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.


*Refer the image below*

The user should select the band check box available for 2g/3g from the given list. Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available in that area.

Operator Selection Mode:

The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.

Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.


If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.

After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.


Wi-Fi Setting:

In this, router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.

The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need.

It has 3 radio modes.

Access point

Client only

Access point and client


Access Point mode:

In Access Point mode, a configuration in which a router, allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network by creating a Wi-Fi hotspot.


Client point:

In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID & client passphrase.


Access point and client point:

Select this option for both type of connection, give both SSID and passphrase.

After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.

The specifications details are below.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Radio 0 Protocol IEEE 802.11 b/g/n This section shows the radio protocol which is by default.
2 Country Code INDIA Select the country accordingly.

(INDIA by default)

3 Channel Auto In this dropdown the user should select the proper channel to be used. (Auto by default)
4 TX Power 100 In this text box the user should specify the power.
5 Channel Width 20 MHz In this dropdown the user should select the channel width
6 Radio Mode 1.) Access point

2.) Client only

3.) Access point and client

In this drop down the user should select the mode.

(Access point by default)

7 Radio SSID AP_37A26230014 In this text box the user should specify the SSID number which usually comes with the router.
8 Radio Authentication WPA2 Personal (PSK) In this dropdown the user should select the type of authentication.

(WPA2 Personal (PSK) by default)

9 Radio Encryption AES In this dropdown the user should select the type of encryption required.

(AES by default)

10 Radio Passphrase ********* In this text box the user should specify the password. Password will be given with the router which can be changed later.
11 Radio DHCP server IP 192.168.100.1 In this text box the user should specify the IP address of DHCP server.

(192.168.100.1 will be default which can be changed accordingly)

12 Radio DHCP start address 100 In this text box the user should specify the start address of the DHCP.

(100 value is default)

13 Radio DHCP limit 50 In this text box the user should specify the limit for the DHCP.

(50 value is default)

Click on save once changes have been made.


Guest Wifi:

This option enables a separate Wi-Fi network for guests, isolated from the main network to enhance security and privacy. Guest Wi-Fi allows visitors or temporary users to connect to your network without accessing the main LAN resources.

Wireless Schedule:

Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.

The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.

Note: This section is turned off by default, tick the box to activate it.

After configuring all the required information, the user should click on save and then click on update to update all the required information.

The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the Wi-Fi working hours.

SMS Settings:

User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page.

This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the

router device.

1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and

adding the mobile numbers below respectively.

API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS.

Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.

After addition of the mobile number’s user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.

*Refer the image below*


1.) Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the tab where you want to find the alert and click on ‘SMS Response Enable’, ‘save’ and ‘update’ button.

2.) Now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number.

3.) Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board will send acknowledgement as per the commands.

4.) After that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again.

Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.

1) {"device”: ["passkey”, “API key"],"command":"reboot","arguments":"hardware"}

2) {"device”: ["passkey ","API key"],"command”: “uptime"}

Loop back IP settings:

The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost.” it is used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.

The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine.

It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.


However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting>>Network configuration>> Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.

After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.

2.2 VLAN

VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a network within a network that segregates traffic into different logical networks on the same physical hardware. VLANs help in managing traffic more effectively and securely.

It is further divided into 2 sections,

Port-Based VLAN

Tagged Port Configuration


Port-Based VLAN:

A VLAN configuration method where network ports are assigned to specific VLANs.

EDIT:

To add a new VLAN ID, click on ‘Add Device’.

To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.

Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.

Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 VLAN ID 1 This is a unique identifier for a VLAN within a network.
2 Port 0 Untagged When a port is set as untagged for a VLAN, it means that traffic entering or exiting this port is automatically associated with that VLAN without any VLAN tags being added to the frames.
3 Port 1 Untagged
4 Port 2 tagged When a port is set as tagged for a VLAN, it means that traffic on this port will include VLAN tags in the Ethernet frames. These tags carry the VLAN ID, allowing switches and other devices to know which VLAN the traffic belongs to.
5 Port 3 Untagged
6 Port 4 OFF When a port is marked as off for a VLAN, it means that the port is not participating in that VLAN at all. It will neither send nor receive traffic associated with that VLAN.

Save and update the page.


Tagged Port Configuration:

EDIT:

To add a new VLAN ID, click on ‘Add Device’.

To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.

Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.

Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Type 802.1Q IEEE 802.1Q is the standard protocol for VLAN tagging in Ethernet networks.
2 Parent Interface Port 2 It is the underlying physical interface like port 2 that carries the VLAN-tagged traffic.

Save and update the page.

2.3 SIM Switch

In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.

The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.


Once the user selects on “signal strength” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.

Threshold RSRP:

This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. (In General, a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).

Threshold SINR:

This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. (In General, a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)

Once the user selects on “Data Limit” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 SIM Switch Based on Data Limit The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.
2 SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB) 1000 The user needs to set the limit for the data usage for SIM 1.
3 SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB) 1000 The user needs to set the limit for the data usage for SIM 2.
4 Periodicity Daily The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to switch the sims.
5 Day Of Month For Ex: 16 The user needs to set the day for switching the sim.

After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.

2.4 Multi-WAN

As shown below, this section has 4 categories,

Status

General settings

Failover

Load Balancing


In ‘Status’ tab user can see the active network connections on the device as shown above.

General Settings:

In general settings, select any one option from the drop-down menu which you wish to imply and click on save and update.


Click on save and update.

Failover:

NOTE: Please verify that the name to be added is in the interface section of the status tab.

EDIT:


The specifications details are below.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Priority Ex: 5 Setting a priority of 1 means this connection has the highest priority and will be used before any others with a higher priority number.
2 Select Track IP Numbers 2 In this dropdown the user needs to select the track number for the Ips. This specifies the number of IP addresses that will be used for tracking the status of the connection.
3 TrackIP1 8.8.8.8 The system will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and working. You can even add any whitelisted IP.
4 TrackIP2 8.8.4.4 The system will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and working. You can even add any whitelisted IP.
5 Reliability 1 If reliability is set to 1, it might mean the connection is considered reliable if it successfully pings at least one of the tracked IP addresses.
6 Count 1 Setting Count to 1 means the device will send one ping to each IP address to check for connectivity.
7 Up 3 If set to 3, the connection will be considered "up" only if all three pings are successful.
8 Down 3 If set to 3, the connection will be considered "down" if all three pings fail.

Click on save and update tab.

Load Balancing:

Load balancing is a network management technique used to distribute traffic across multiple network connections or servers to optimize resource use, maximize throughput, minimize response time, and ensure reliability.

Task: Distributes network traffic evenly across multiple connections (e.g., multiple WAN links) or servers.

Purpose: This ensures that no single connection or server is overwhelmed with too much traffic, which could lead to congestion and slower performance.

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Traffic Distribution Ratio Ex: 60% If you have two connections and set one to 60% and the other to 40%, traffic will be distributed accordingly.

The ratio must be the same for CWAN1_0 and CWAN1_1.

2 Select Track IP Numbers 2 The system will track two IP addresses to determine if the network connection is active and reliable.
3 TrackIP1 8.8.8.8 The system will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and working. You can even add any whitelisted IP.
4 TrackIP2 8.8.4.4 The system will ping this IPV4 IP address to check if the connection is up and working. You can even add any whitelisted IP.
5 Reliability 1 With a reliability setting of 1, the connection might be considered reliable if at least one ping is successful.
6 Count 1 The system will send one ping to each tracked IP to check the connection's status.
7 Up 3 The system requires 3 successful pings for the connection to be marked as "up."
8 Down 3 If 3 pings fail, the system will mark the connection as "down," and it may switch to an alternate connection if available.

Click on save and update tab.

2.5 VPN

VPN stands for Virtual Private Network, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.

Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.

Navigate to settings >= VPN, general settings and you will see all VPN options you wish to use.

Refer the below figure.

There are 7 types of setting available under VPN configuration.

  • General Settings
  • IPSEC
  • Open VPN
  • Wireguard
  • Zerotier
  • PPTP
  • L2TP


General Settings:

In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device. The user must select from the above VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select all the options. The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its use.

IPSEC:

IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks.

To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.

In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.

The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.

In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.

Click on update once done with configurations.

The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.

IPSEC VPN has been Eshtablished.

Detailed specifications are below:

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 IPSEC Site to Site VPN In this dropdown the user should select the IPSEC connection type.
2 IPSEC Role Client/Server In this dropdown box the user needs to select the IPSEC role. The device is acting as a client in the VPN setup (in this example).
3 Connection Type Tunnel In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.
4 Connection mode Route/add/start/trap In this drop down list the user should select the mode for the connection. In this example start is selected which means the VPN connection is initiated automatically.
5 Remote Server IP ******** The IP address of the remote VPN server.
6 Local ID 3.3.3.3 The user needs to set the local id. It is the identification for the local VPN client.
7 No. of local subnets 1 In this dropdown the user needs to select how many subnets will be connected.
8 Local Subnet 1 172.16.31.25/32 In this text box the user needs to put the specific local subnet included in the VPN.
9 Remote id 1.1.1.1 In this text box the user needs to put the id of the remote connection. It is the identification for the remote VPN server.
10 No of remote subnet 1 In this dropdown the user needs to select how many subnets it will be connected remotely.
11 Remote subnet 10.1.1.0/24 In this text box the user needs to put the address of the remote subnet. The specific remote subnet included in the VPN.
12 Key exchange Ikev1 In this dropdown the user should select the which key exchange version to be selected.
13 Aggressive Yes/No In this dropdown the user should select either yes or no.
14 IKE Lifetime (In Seconds) 86400 The lifetime of the IKE phase in seconds (1 day).
15 Lifetime (in seconds) 28800 The lifetime of the IPsec SA (Security Association) in seconds (8 hours).
16 Enable DPD Detection 1

0

Indicates whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable this option as per server-side settings.
17 Time Interval (In Seconds) 60 This option is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the interval for DPD checks.
18 Action Restart/clear/hold/

trap/start

Restart: Action to take when DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per server-side setting.
19 Authentication Method PSK PSK: Pre-shared key is used for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side setting.
20 Multiple Secrets 1/0 Indicates whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.
21 PSK Value ****** Pre-shared key value (masked for security).
Proposal settings Phase I
22 Encryption Algorithm AES 128

AES 192

AES 256

3DES

AES 256: Encryption algorithm for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.
23 Authentication Phase I SHA1

MD5

SHA 256

SHA 384

SHA 512

SHA 512: Authentication algorithm for Phase I.

Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.

24 DH Group MODP768(group1)

MODP1024(group2)

MODP1536(group5)

MODP2048(group14)

MODP3072(group15)

MODP4096(group16)

MODP2048 (group14): Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.

Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.

Proposal settings Phase II
25 Hash Algorithm AES 128

AES 192

AES 256

3DES

AES 256: Encryption algorithm for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.
26 Authentication Phase II SHA1

MD5

SHA 256

SHA 384

SHA 512

SHA 512: Authentication algorithm for Phase II.

Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.

27 PFS Group MODP768(group1)

MODP1024(group2)

MODP1536(group5)

MODP2048(group14)

MODP3072(group15)

MODP4096(group16)

MODP2048 (group14): Perfect Forward Secrecy group.

Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.

Click on save and then update the page for changes to reflect.

Open VPN:

To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.

The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”

Only the TAP connection needs a bridge. The tun connection does not require a bridge. Here we have established a TUN connection.

By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.

VPN TUN has been established.

Same way VPN TAP can also be established with the help of bridging.

WireGuard:

WireGuard is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.

Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.

EDIT:

Click on the save button after the required configuration.

Specifications details are given below:

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Wireguard Role Client/Server In this dropdown box the user needs to select the wireguard role.
2 WireGuard Tunnel Over IPV4/IPV6 IPV4: Use this if your network and endpoint (WireGuard server) support only IPv4.

IPV6: Use this if your network and endpoint support IPv6.

3 Enable Failover Enable/Disable This option allows the VPN connection to automatically switch to a backup connection if the primary connection fails.
4 Enable IPV4 Enable/Disable This enables IPv4 traffic to be routed through the WireGuard tunnel.
5 Enable IPV6 Enable/Disable Enable this if your network and the destination support IPv6.
6 Listen Port 51820 This is the default port that WireGuard uses to listen for incoming connections.
7 Endpoint Host port 51820 This is the port on the WireGuard server that the client will connect to.
8 Peer Publickey ***** This is the public key of the WireGuard server that the client uses to establish a secure connection.
9 Enable Default Route Enable/Disable Enable this if you want all network traffic (not just specific routes) to be routed through the WireGuard VPN.

Save and update the page after configuration has been done.


Zerotier:

ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.

Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account.

In ZeroTier Central, click on "Create a Network". This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.

Go to settings => VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.


Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.

Click on the save button after the required configuration.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 NetworkID Ad2769hfkw2345f4 In this dropdown box the user needs to paste the unique 16-digit network id.
2 Listen Port 9993 Default


PPTP:

This configuration is for setting up a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunnelling Protocol) VPN connection.

PPTP is a protocol that enables secure data transmission across public networks like the internet, often used to connect to remote networks or access resources securely.

*Refer the image below*

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 PPTP Role Client/Server Client: meaning it will initiate the connection to the remote PPTP server.

Server: means this device will accept incoming PPTP connections from clients, which can be users or devices that need remote access to the local network or internet via this server.

PPTP Role: CLIENT
2 Default Route Enable/Disable Enabling the default route means that all network traffic will be routed through the VPN tunnel once the connection is established.
3 Metric Ex: 0 The metric is a value that defines the priority of this route among other available routes. Lower metrics indicate higher priority.
4 Server IP Ex: 192.168.10.1 This is the IP address of the PPTP server the client will connect to.
5 Interface Any

EWAN5

Selecting the correct interface is essential because it tells the system which network adapter should be used to establish the VPN connection.
6 Username ****** This field is the login username for the PPTP server.
7 Password **** This is the password associated with the username.
PPTP Role: SERVER
8 Local IP Ex: 192.168.0.1 This IP address (192.168.0.1) is the local IP of the PPTP server on its network. Clients connecting to the VPN will see this address as their gateway or endpoint within the VPN.
9 Remote IP Range Ex: 192.168.0.20-30 This range defines the pool of IP addresses that the server will assign to connected VPN clients. Here, any client connecting to the server will receive an IP address between 192.168.0.20 and 192.168.0.30, which provides up to 11 possible addresses for simultaneous connections.
10 Username Ex: User1 This is a username that the client will use to authenticate with the PPTP server. In this case, User1 is designated as an authorized user.
11 Password ***** The password associated with User1 is required to complete the authentication.

Once Configured, click on save and update.

L2TP:

L2TP (Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol) is a network protocol used to establish secure tunnels for transferring data between remote devices or networks, often in VPNs, by encapsulating data for encryption and routing.

*Refer the image below*

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 L2TP Role Client/Server Client: connecting to an L2TP server to establish a secure tunnel for communication.

Server: the server listens for incoming client connections.

L2TP Role: CLIENT
2 Default Route Enable/Disable If enabled, all outbound traffic will be routed through the L2TP connection.

If disabled, only specific traffic destined for the L2TP network will use the tunnel.

3 Metric Ex: 1 The system uses this metric to decide which route to prioritize if multiple routes exist.

L2TP connection with Metric 1 will take precedence over a LAN or WAN route with Metric 10.

4 Server IP Ex: 192.168.10.1 This is the IP address of the L2TP server to which the client will connect.

Local Networks: If connecting within a LAN, the server might have an IP like 192.168.x.x.

Remote Connections: The server IP might be a public address like 203.0.113. x.

5 Checkup Interval Time (in sec) Ex: 30/60 secs Setting 30 seconds ensures the client checks the connection every half-minute. If the tunnel drops, the client can quickly reconnect.
6 Interface Any Example interfaces might include eth0, usb0, or ra0.
7 Username Ex: User The server verifies the username to grant or deny access.

Must match credentials configured on the L2TP server.

8 Password ****** Should be kept secure and match the configuration on the server.

Masked for privacy during configuration.

9 MPPE Encryption Enable/Disable Enabled: Encrypts traffic using MPPE, enhancing security (recommended).

Disabled: Transmits data unencrypted, reducing overhead but exposing traffic to potential risks.

L2TP Role: SERVER
10 Local IP Ex: 192.168.0.1 This is the local IP address of the L2TP server. It serves as the gateway for clients connected via the L2TP tunnel.
11 Start Ex: 192.168.0.20 Specifies the first IP address that can be assigned to connected clients.
12 Limit Ex: 192.168.0.30 Creates an IP pool for clients (from 192.168.0.20 to 192.168.0.30 in this case).
13 Username Ex: User1 Ensures that only authorized users can connect.

The server verifies this username against its authentication database.

14 Password ****** The server verifies the password along with the username.

The password must match the one configured on the server for successful authentication.

2.6 Firewall

A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet.

Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device.

Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.

To configure a Firewall, navigate to settings <= firewall,

There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.

  • General Settings
  • Port forwards
  • Traffic Rules
  • SNAT traffic Rules
  • Parental Control
  • Zone Forwarding

General Settings:

General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,

1.) General settings

In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable SYN-flood protection Enabled This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
2 Disable IPV6 Disabled This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
3 Drop invalid packets Disabled This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
4 TCP SYN Cookies Disabled This is enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.
5 Input Reject/Accept By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
6 Output Reject/Accept By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.
7 Forward Reject/Accept By default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’ compulsory.


2.) Zone settings

In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.


Port Forwards:

Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.

It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.

This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.

EDIT:


Click on the save button after the required configuration.

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Name Example: Web_Server_Forward Field must not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.
2 Protocol Example: TCP+UDP Select the protocol for the rule.

Options typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.

3 Source zone Example: SW_LAN Select the source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN
4 Source MAC address [optional] Example: any any: Leave as any if you don't want to specify a MAC address.
5 Source IP address[optional] Example: Leave blank if not needed. Optionally specify an IP address or range.
6 Source port Example: 80, 443 (if matching traffic for web server ports) Specify the source port or port range.
7 Destination zone Example: SW_LAN Select the destination zone where the traffic is heading to.
8 Destination IP address Leave blank if not needed. Optionally specify the destination IP address or range.
9 Destination port Example: 80 (if redirecting to a web server port) Specify the destination port or port range.

Traffic Rule:

"Traffic rules" refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.

To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.

EDIT:

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Name Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS Field must not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.
2 Restrict to Address Family 1.     Options: IPv4, IPv6

Example: IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.

Select the address family to generate iptables rules for.
3 Protocol Example: TCP+UDP TCP+UDP: Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.
4 Match ICMP Type Example: any Match all ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.
5 Source Zone Example: LAN Specifies the traffic source zone.
6 Enable DDoS Prevention Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention measures Enable or disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.
7 Source MAC Address Example: any any: Match traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.
8 Source Address Example: 192.168.1.0/24 Match incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.
9 Source Port Example: any if all source ports should be matched any: Match incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.
10 Destination Zone Example: WAN Specifies the traffic destination zone.
11 Action Example: ACCEPT Options: ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.
12 Limit Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per minute. Maximum average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second, /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.
13 Extra arguments Example: --log-prefix "Blocked: " to add a log prefix to log messages for this rule. Passes additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter rule behaviour.

Click on save once configured.

SNAT Traffic Rule:

For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.

To add new source NAT,

Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”

EDIT:


Specification details are below:

SN Field name Sample value Description
1 Name Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN Field must not be empty: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.
2 Protocol Example: TCP+UDP TCP+UDP: Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.
3 Source Zone Example: wan wan: Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.
4 Source IP Address Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24 -- please choose --: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule applies to any source IP.
5 Source Port Example: any any: Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.
6 Destination Zone Example: lan lan: Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.
7 Destination IP Address Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100 -- please choose --: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule applies to any destination IP.
8 Destination port Example: any any: Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.
9 SNAT IP Address Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address) -- please choose --: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be translated.
10 SNAT Port Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port like ‘12345’ Optionally, rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only rewrite the IP address.
11 Extra Arguments Example: --log-prefix "SNAT_traffic: " (to add a log prefix to log messages for this rule) Pass additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter rule behaviour.

Click on save once configured.

Parental Control:

For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and

destination zones, as well as specific devices.

To add parental control in firewall,

Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Name Example: Parental_Control_Sunday Field must not be empty: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental control rule.
2 Proto all all: This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.
3 Source Zone Example: lan Field must not be empty: Please look at Firewall->Zone Settings to find zone names.
4 Destination Zone Example: wan Field must not be empty: Please look at Firewall->Zone Settings to find zone names.
5 Source MAC Address Example: 00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E Field: Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.
6 Target Example: Reject Accept: This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.
7 Weekdays Example: Sunday Sunday: Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.
8 Month Days Example: All All: Specify the days of the month when the rule should be active.
9 Start Time (hh:mm:ss) Example: 18:00:00 (6:00 PM) Field must not be empty: Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.
10 Stop Time (hh:mm:ss) Example: 22:00:00 (10:00 PM) Field must not be empty: Specify the stop time when the rule should end.

Click on save once configured.


Zone Forwarding:

Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.

To ADD new zone,

Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.

EDIT:

Specification details are below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Source Zone Example options: lan, wan, etc. --please choose--: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.
2 Destination Zone Example options: lan, wan, etc. --please choose--: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.

Click on save once configured.

2.7 Loopback Rule

In this page the user can configure the port where he wants to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different ports as per the requirement.

The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Name Example: loopback Provide a descriptive name for the rule.
2 Protocol Example: TCP+UDP TCP+UDP: Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.
3 Source IP Address [Optional] Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24 Optionally specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply to any source IP.
4 Source Port [Optional] Example: any any: Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any allows traffic from all ports.
5 Loopback IP Address Example: 127.0.0.1 Specify the loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.
6 Port Example: any any: Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed. any allows traffic to all ports.
7 Action Example: DNAT This specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.
8 Internal IP Address Example: 192.168.1.100 Field must not be empty: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should be redirected.
9 Internal Port Example: any Redirect matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.

Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.

2.8 VRRP

VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) is used to ensure high availability for IP routing by allowing multiple routers to work together to present the illusion of a single virtual router to the hosts on a network.

In General Settings, click on ‘Enable VRRP’ and save.

In VRRP section,

Give a name and ‘Add’ device.

Click on ‘Edit’ to make changes.

Click on ‘Delete’ if particular instance not required.

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Role 1.      Master

2.      Backup

Choose Master for the primary router that should handle the traffic under normal circumstances.

Choose Backup for a secondary router that will take over if the master fails.

2 Virtual ID Ex: 0 The value can range from 0 to 255.

Ensure all routers in the same VRRP group share the same Virtual ID.

3 Priority Ex: 100 For the Master role, use the highest priority, typically above 100.

For the Backup role, set a lower priority number, usually below the master's priority.

4 Interface SW_LAN This is the network interface on which VRRP operates.
5 Source IP Ex: 192.168.10.1 This is the IP address used as the source in VRRP advertisements.
6 Peer IP Ex: 192.168.10.10 This is the IP address of the other VRRP peer (usually the backup router). It helps the routers identify each other.
7 Virtual IP Address 192.168.10.100/24 The virtual IP should be an unused address within the subnet, such as 192.168.10.100/24, ensuring it's consistent across all VRRP routers.
8 Enable Authentication Enable/Disable Enable this if you want to secure your VRRP communications.
9 Password ********* It ensures that only routers with the correct password can join the VRRP group.

Save and update once changes have been made.

2.9 Remote Monitoring

In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.

Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.

NMS:

IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.

Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).

TR_069:

To enable the TR_069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.

Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Serving Interval 300 A value of 300 seconds means the device will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.
2 Interface This can be something like eth0 or wan. This specifies the network interface used for TR-069 communication.
3 Username Example: User The username used to authenticate with the ACS.
4 Password •••• The password used to authenticate with the ACS.
5 URL http://example.com The URL of the ACS. This is where the CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will receive configurations and updates from.


The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.

2.10 Tunnel

Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.

It is further categorised into 3 sections,

1.) General Settings

2.) GRE Tunnel

3.) IPIP Tunnel

General Settings:

In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.

Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click on the save button.



GRE Tunnel:

A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.

Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.

Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.


EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Tunnel name Example: GRETunnel GRETunnel: The name of the GRE tunnel.
2 Local external IP Example: 10.1.1.66 The IP address of the local endpoint that will initiate the GRE tunnel.
3 Remote external IP Example: 10.1.1.40 The IP address of the remote endpoint that will terminate the GRE tunnel.
4 Peer tunnel IP Example: 10.1.1.4 The IP address of the peer's tunnel interface.
5 Local tunnel IP Example: 10.1.1.6 The IP address of the local tunnel interface.
6 Local tunnel net mask Example: 255.255.255.0 The subnet mask of the local tunnel interface.
7 Remote IP Example: 192.168.10.0/24 The remote network that is reachable through the GRE tunnel.
8 Enable Tunnel Link Check to enable Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.
9 Interface type Example: EWAN2 EWAN2: The type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.
10 MTU Example: 1476 1476: Maximum Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.
11 TTL Example: 64 64: Time To Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.
12 Tunnel key Example: 12345678 12345678: A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.
13 Enable keep alive Check to enable Enable or disable the keep-alive feature to monitor the tunnel's status.
14 Keep alive interval Example: 10 10: Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.

Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.


IPIP Tunnel:

An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunnelling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. This is like GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.

Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.


EDIT:

Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Tunnel name Example: IPIPTunnel IPIPTunnel: The name of the IPIP tunnel.
2 Local external IP Example: 10.1.1.66 The IP address of the local endpoint that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.
3 Remote external IP Example: 10.1.1.40 The IP address of the remote endpoint that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.
4 Peer tunnel IP Example: 10.1.1.4 The IP address of the peer's tunnel interface.
5 Local tunnel IP Example: 10.1.1.6 The IP address of the local tunnel interface.
6 Local tunnel net mask Example: 255.255.255.0 The subnet mask of the local tunnel interface.
7 Remote IP Example: 192.168.10.0/24 The remote network that is reachable through the IPIP tunnel.
8 Enable Tunnel Link Check to enable Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.
9 Interface type Example: EWAN2 EWAN2: The type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.
10 MTU Example: 1476 1476: Maximum Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.
11 TTL Example: 64 64: Time To Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.
12 Tunnel key Example: 12345678 Although typically not used in IPIP, this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.
13 Enable keep alive Check to enable Enable or disable the keep-alive feature to monitor the tunnel's status.
14 Keep alive interval Example: 10 10: Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.

3.Maintenance

In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password,

firmware and monitoring.

It includes 6 submodules.

  • General
  • Password
  • Reboot
  • Import and Export config
  • Firmware upgrade
  • Monitor Application

*Below is the detailed explanation of every field*

3.1 General

Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.

It is further sub-divided into,

1.) General Settings

2.) Logging

3.) Language and Style


General Settings:

EDIT:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Local Time 2024/07/30 13:25:47 The current local date and time set on the device.
2 Hostname 22B25240007 The hostname of the device, which is used to identify it on the network.
3 Timezone Asia/Kolkata The timezone setting of the device, which determines the local time.

Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.

Logging:

Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.

The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log verbosity levels.

EDIT:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 System log buffer size Example: 32 kiB The size of the memory buffer allocated (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or sent to an external server.
2 External system log server Example: 0.0.0.0 The IP address of an external server where logs can be sent.
3 External system log server port Example: 514 The port used to send logs to the external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.
4 Log output level Example: Debug Sets the detail level of the system logs.
5 Cron Log level Example: Debug The detail level of the logs for cron jobs.

Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.


Language and Style:

Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.

Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.

3.2 Password

In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.

Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enters a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.

3.3 Reboot

In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.

First option is to directly reboot the device without enabling the maintenance reboot tab.

Click on “Reboot Now” at the bottom of the screen to start the reboot process.


To start maintenance reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.

Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable Maintenance Reboot Enable/Disable Indicates whether the maintenance reboot feature is enabled or not.
2 Type Maintenance Reboot Specifies the type of reboot being scheduled.
3 Reboot Type Software/Hardware Hardware: A hardware reboot involves restarting the entire device as if it were powered off and on again.

Software: A software reboot involves restarting the operating system without powering off the hardware.

4 Minutes Example: 59 The minute at which the reboot should occur (0-59).
5 Hours Example: 22 (10 PM) The hour at which the reboot should occur (0-23, in 24-hour format).
6 Day Of Month Example: All Specifies which days of the month the reboot should occur (1-31). "All" means it will occur every day.
7 Month Example: All Specifies which months the reboot should occur (1-12). "All" means it will occur every month.
8 Day Of Week Example: All Specifies which days of the week the reboot should occur (0-6, where 0 is Sunday). "All" means it will occur every day of the week.

Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.

3.4 Import and Export

In this section, User can Import & Export Configuration files of the Device.

Click “Export Config” to export device configuration & settings to a text file,

Click “Import Config” to import device configuration & settings from a previously exported text file.

The user needs to select on the “choose file”, upload the required file and click on apply.

3.5 Firmware Upgrade

The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware.

Click on the flash image and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.

This option will completely reset the device to default settings.

Click on the Retain Config and flash and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.

This refers to updating the firmware (flashing) of a device while preserving the current configuration settings.

Click on the Factory Reset for the complete retest of the device.

3.6 Monitor Application

In this section, the monitor application is divided into major 2 configurations which is further sub-divided into 4 editable options,

1.) Modem Monitor Application Configuration:

2.) Router Monitor Application Configuration:

Modem Monitor Application Configuration:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable Ping Check Application Enable/Disable Turns on the functionality to perform ping checks on specified IP addresses.
2 Time Interval for Check (In minutes) Example: 10 minutes Frequency at which the ping checks are performed.
3 Select No of IP addresses to ping Example: 1 Number of IP addresses that will be pinged.
4 IP Address 1 Example: 8.8.8.8 The IP address to ping.
5 No. of Retries Example: 5 Number of times to retry pinging an IP address if the initial ping fails.
6 Failure Criteria in (%) Example: 80% (If 4 out of 5 pings fail, it’s considered a failure) Percentage of failed pings required to consider the ping check a failure.
7 Action On Failure Example: Restart Modem Action to be taken if the ping check fails according to the criteria.
8 Enable Second Level Action Enable/Disable Option to enable a secondary action if the primary action fails multiple times.
9 Second Level Action Threshold Example: 2 Number of failures required to trigger the secondary action.
10 Second Level Action Example: Restart Board (Reboots the entire hardware board) The action to be taken if the second level action threshold is met.

Save the details once made necessary changes.

Router Monitor Application Configuration:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable Ping Check Application Enable/Disable Activates the ping check functionality to monitor router performance.
2 Time Interval for Check (In minutes) Example: 10 minutes How frequently the ping checks are performed.
3 Select No of IP Addresses to Ping Example: 1 (Please select the appropriate number based on your requirements) Choose the number of IP addresses to ping. This typically involves selecting from a list or entering multiple addresses.
4 No. of Retries Example: 3 Number of retries if a ping fails.
5 Failure Criteria in (%) Example: 80% (If 80% of the pings fail, it’s deemed a failure) Percentage of failed pings required to consider the ping check as failed.
6 Action On Failure Example: Restart IPsec The action taken if the ping check fails according to the criteria.
7 Enable Second Level Action Enable/Disable Option to enable an additional action if the primary action fails.
8 Second Level Action Threshold Example: Specify the number of failures, such as 2 Number of times the primary action must fail before the secondary action is triggered.
9 Second Level Action Example: Restart Board The action to be taken if the second level action threshold is met.

Save the details once made necessary changes.

4.Status

In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.

It has 4 submodules.

  • Interfaces
  • Internet
  • Modem
  • Routes

4.1 Interfaces

Each network device (interface) is associated with specific traffic statistics, uptime, and status. Active interfaces are operational, while inactive interfaces are not currently transmitting data.

Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular, wifi, ewan, vpn etc is up.

4.2 Internet

In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.

 To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.

4.3 Modem

This modem status page provides comprehensive information about the cellular connection's network operator, technology, mode, and various signal quality metrics.

4.4 Routes

This configuration shows how the router directs traffic between different networks and interfaces, ensuring proper communication within the local network and to external networks via the default gateway.

ARP Table: Maps IP addresses to MAC addresses for devices on the network, helping in identifying which device is on which interface.

IPv4 Routes: This shows which network is directly connected on which interface.

Example: Network 192.168.10.0/24 is directly connected on interface eth0.1.

IPv6 Routes: Similar routes as IPv4, but this time listed under IPv6 routing rules.

Example: Local networks 192.168.10.0/24 and 192.168.100.0/24 are managed through eth0.1 and ra0, respectively.

*Refer the below image*

5. Features

In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.

This module includes 7 features.

  • Mac Address Binding
  • URL Filtering
  • Web Server
  • Wi-Fi MacID Filtering
  • Routing
  • DMZ
  • Others

5.1 Mac Address Binding

MAC address binding is a configuration that binds a specific MAC address to a specific IP address. This ensures that a particular device on the network always receives the same IP address from the DHCP server, which can be useful for network management, security, and ensuring consistent network behaviour.

Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC.

You can edit the pre-existing configuration, or you can ‘Add’ in the ‘New MAC ADDRESS’ field.

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Device Name Macbinding1 A user-defined name for the binding configuration.
2 MAC Address 48:9e:bd:da:45:91 The unique identifier for the network interface of the device to which the IP address will be bound.
3 IP Address 192.168.10.55 The IP address that will be consistently assigned to the device with the specified MAC address.

By applying this configuration, the DHCP server will always assign the IP address 192.168.10.55 to the device with the MAC address 48:9e:bd:da:45:91, ensuring consistency and stability in network addressing for that device.

  • Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.
  • The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.

Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.

5.2 URL Filtering

In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device. By implementing URL filtering with the specified URL, you can control and restrict access to certain websites, thereby improving network security and managing user access.


To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.

Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save.

The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.

To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.

Click on “save” after the changes are done as per the need.

5.3 Web Server

This configuration will allow your device to serve web traffic securely over HTTPS, keep its system time synchronized, and ensure that all HTTP traffic is redirected to HTTPS for better security.

EDIT:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable HTTP HTTP Port: 80

Enable or disable the HTTP server.

Port 80 is the default port for HTTP traffic. It is used to serve web pages over an unencrypted connection.
2 Enable HTTPS HTTPS Port: 443

Enable or disable the HTTPS server.

Port 443 is the default port for HTTPS traffic. It is used to serve web pages over an encrypted connection.
3 Redirect HTTPS Option to redirect HTTP traffic to HTTPS. When enabled, all HTTP requests will be automatically redirected to the HTTPS port to ensure secure communication.
4 Session Timeout (in millisecs) Ex: 60000 In this scenario the webpage will logout after 60secs of inactivity.
5 RFC1918 Filter Enable/Disable When enabled, this filter can block traffic from private IP ranges (e.g., 192.168.x.x, 10.x.x.x) from being routed through the public internet, enhancing network security.
6 Enable NTP Sync Enable or disable NTP synchronization. Synchronizes the device’s system clock with an external NTP server to maintain accurate time.
7 NTP Server 0.openwrt.pool.ntp.org The address of the NTP server used for time synchronization. The openwrt.pool.ntp.org server is a public NTP server pool.
8 NTP Sync Interval (In Minutes) 15 The interval at which the device will sync its clock with the NTP server, set to every 15 minutes in this case.

Click on save once changes are made.

5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering

Wireless MAC ID Filtering allows you to control which devices can connect to your wireless network based on their MAC (Media Access Control) addresses. This can help enhance security by allowing only specified devices to access the network.

It is further divided into 2 categories,

WIFI 2.4G AP

WIFI 2.4G AP Guest

Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.

In ‘Change Mode’ select one option,

Blacklist

In blacklist mode, you specify which MAC addresses are not allowed to connect to the wireless network. Devices not on the blacklist will be able to connect.

Whitelist

In whitelist mode, you specify which MAC addresses are allowed to connect to the wireless network. Devices not on the whitelist will be blocked.

To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Status Enable/Disable Enable or disable the MAC ID filtering.
2 MAC ID Example: e8:6f:38:1a:f2:61 The MAC address of the device to be whitelisted or blocklisted.
3 Network Name Example: WIFI 2.4G AP or Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest. The network to apply the MAC ID filtering.

Once the required MAC ID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.

The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.

Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.

5.5 Routing

In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device like Target address, Networks address etc. Routing configurations allow network packets to be directed between different subnets and networks.

It is further divided into 2 sections,

Static IPV4 Routes

Advanced Static IPV4 Routes

Static IPV4 Routes:

Click on ‘Add’ to add a new interface.


EDIT:

To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.

Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.

Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.


Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Interface Ex: eth0.1 The network interface to be used for this route. Select the one to use from dropdown.
2 Target Ex: 192.168.20.0 The destination subnet to which traffic should be routed.
3 IPv4 Netmask 255.255.255.0 The subnet mask for the target network.
4 Metric 0 The priority of the route.

Lower values indicate higher priority.

5 IPv4 Gateway Ex: 192.168.10.1 The gateway IP address to be used for routing traffic to the target subnet.
6 Route Type Unicast Standard route for individual destination IP addresses.

Custom changes can be made.

Click on save once configuration changes have been made.

Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:

Click on ‘Add’ to add a new interface.

EDIT:

To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.

Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.

Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Interface Ex: ra0 The network interface through which the traffic will be routed. Select as per requirement.
2 To Ex: 192.168.10.1 This is the target address to which the traffic is being directed. In this case, all traffic destined for 192.168.10.1 will follow this route.
3 IPv4 Netmask 255.255.255.192 This defines the subnet of the destination address.
4 Table 1.) Local

2.) Main

3.) Default

4.) 220

5.) custom

1.) This table contains local routes for the addresses assigned to the local interfaces. It's typically used for host and broadcast addresses.

2.) The primary routing table used by the system.

3.) A fallback table used when no other table is specified.

4.) Often used for policy-based routing.

5.) A user-defined routing table.

5 From Ex: 192.168.100.1 This source address restricts the route to traffic originating from 192.168.100.1. Traffic from other sources won't use this route.
6 Priority 20 The priority value determines the preference of this route. A lower number means higher priority; 20 is relatively high, so this route will be preferred over routes with higher priority values.

Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.

5.6 DMZ

A DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) is a subnetwork that provides an extra layer of security for an organization's internal network.

In this case we are configuring several services (HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, FTP, DNS) in a DMZ, and each service requires the correct internal port (the port used within the network) and external port (the port used by external clients to access the service) settings.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable DMZ Enable/Disable Enable DMZ to configure it further.
2 Host IP Address Ex: 192.168.10.1 This is the internal IP address of the device or server that will be in the DMZ.
3 Protocol 1.) TCP

2.) UDP

3.) ICMP

4.) All

TCP: Used for reliable services like HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, and SSH.

UDP: Often used for services like DNS that don't require as much reliability.

ICMP: Used for sending control messages like "ping."

All: Select this if you're unsure which protocol to allow, but it's less secure.

4 Allow HTTP Internal Port: 80

External Port: 80

Enables web traffic over the unsecured HTTP protocol.

(Port 80 is the standard port for HTTP traffic on our internal network).

5 Allow HTTPS Internal Port: 443

External Port: 443

Enables secure web traffic over HTTPS. (Port 443 is the standard port for HTTPS on our internal network).
6 Allow SSH Internal Port: 52434

External Port: 52434

This is a custom port we’re using for SSH.

The default is 22.

7 Allow FTP Internal Port: 21/20

External Port: 21/20

FTP is used to transfer files between computers.

(These are the standard ports for FTP traffic. Port 21 is used for control commands, and port 20 for the data transfer.)

8 Allow DNS Internal Port: 53

External Port: 53

Standard DNS port within our internal network.

5.7 Others

In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters. Each utility serves a specific purpose, providing various functionalities for managing and troubleshooting network configurations and statuses.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Set Date Date and time fields (day, month, year, hour, minute, second) Sets the system date and time to the specified values.
2 Get Date System Retrieves and displays the current system date and time.
3 ipsec status all Command ‘Get’ Displays the status of all IPsec connections.
4 Wi-Fi Scan Command ‘Get’ Initiates a scan for available Wi-Fi networks.
5 iPerf3 Client IP address (e.g., 192.168.10.100) Runs an iPerf3 client to measure network performance.
6 iPerf3 Server Command ‘Run’ Runs an iPerf3 server to measure network performance.
7 Ping IP address or domain (e.g., 8.8.8.8) Sends ICMP echo requests to the specified address to check connectivity.
8 traceroute IP address or domain (e.g., 8.8.8.8) Traces the route packets take to reach the specified address.
9 NTP Sync Command ‘Sync’ Synchronizes the system time with the configured NTP server.
10 Download Files File or database identifier Initiates a download of the specified file or database.
11 Restart Power Command ‘Restart’ Restarts the power of the device.
12 Restart Modem Command ‘Restart’ Restarts the modem.
13 Run AT Command Enter AT command Executes the specified AT command on the modem.
14 Show Board Configuration Command ‘Show’ Displays the current board configuration.
15 Show VPN Certificate Name Command ‘Show’ Displays the name of the VPN certificate in use.
16 Switch SIM to Secondary (Takes >2 mins) Command ‘Run’ Switches the active SIM to the secondary SIM card.
17 Send test SMS Phone number (e.g., +911234567890) message text (e.g., "Hello how are you?") Sends a test SMS to the specified phone number.
18 ReadlatestSMS Command ‘Read’ Reads the most recent SMS received by the device.
19 Data Usage From: Start date (YYYY-MM-DD)

To: End date (YYYY-MM-DD)

Displays data usage statistics for the specified date range.
20 Monthly Data Usage Month: Month (e.g., 07)

Year: Year (e.g., 2024)

Displays data usage statistics for the specified month and year.
21 Modem Debug Info Command ‘Read’ Displays debug information for the modem.
22 Scan Network operators (Takes >3 mins) Command ‘Scan’ Initiates a scan for available network operators.
23 Network operator list (First Perform Scan Network Operators) Command ‘Show’ Displays the list of network operators detected in the previous scan.
24 ReadLogFiles Log file identifier Reads and displays the specified log file
25 Enable ssh (Admin) Command ‘Run’ Enables SSH access for the admin user.
26 Disable ssh (Admin) Command ‘Run’ Disables SSH access for the admin user.
27 ClearSIM1Data Command ‘Clear’ Clears data usage statistics for SIM1.
28 ClearSIM2Data Command ‘Clear’ Clears data usage statistics for SIM2.
29 Create Bridge with SW_LAN Network interface identifier Creates a network bridge with the specified interface and SW_LAN.
30 Show Bridge Command ‘Show’ Displays information about the current network bridges.
31 Delete Bridge Command ‘Delete’ Deletes the specified network bridge.
32 Output Any value Displays output for all the above actions.

5.8 SNMP Agent Configuration

The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Agent Configuration is essential for monitoring and managing network devices, such as routers, from a central management system.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable SNMP Service Enable/Disable Enable this if you want the device to be accessible for SNMP-based monitoring and management.
2 IP Family IPV4 Specifies that SNMP service will operate over IPv4.
3 Port 161 161 is the default and should be used unless there is a specific need to use a different port.
4 System OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.38151 This unique identifier represents the device in the SNMP management system.
5 Name Invendis Router The name used to identify the device in the SNMP management system.
6 Contact Invendis@invendis.co The email address of the person responsible for the device, used for administrative contact.
7 Location Bangalore The physical location of the device.
8 SNMP Version Version-1,

Version-2,

Version-3

Version-1: Basic and outdated, offering no security.

Version-2: An improvement over Version-1 with better performance and some security features.

Version-3: The most secure, offering authentication and encryption (AuthPriv).

9 Security       (for SNMP Version-3) NoAuthNoPriv

AuthNoPriv

AuthPriv

No Authentication, No Privacy

Authentication, No Privacy

Authentication and Privacy

10 Username Ex: admin The username used for SNMP authentication.
11 Authentication Password ******* This password is used to authenticate the SNMP user.
12 Privacy Password ******* This password is used to encrypt SNMP messages.
13 Download MIB File Download Click this to download the MIB file associated with the device’s SNMP configuration.


Click on save tab to save changes.

5.9 Connection Diagnostics

This can ensure that your connection diagnostics application effectively monitors and reports the status of your network connections, providing valuable data for troubleshooting and performance optimization.

This Application works in 3 parts,

1.) General settings

2.) Connection status and management

3.) Application Start/Stop

General settings:

First make configuration changes in this section and save.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable Connection Diagnostics Enable/Disable This option enables or disables the connection diagnostics functionality.
2 Check Interval (in seconds) Value: 120 Specifies how often (in seconds) the diagnostics checks are performed. In this case, every 120 seconds. (min 60 secs)
3 Number of Pings Value: 5 Determines ping requests sent during each check.
4 Ping Packet Size (in Bytes) Value: 56 Defines the size of each ping packet in bytes.
5 Send to remote MQTT Broker Enable/Disable This option enables the sending of diagnostic data to a remote MQTT broker.
6 Publish Data Format CSV / JSON Specifies the format in which the diagnostic data will be published to the MQTT broker. You can choose either CSV (Comma-Separated Values) or JSON (JavaScript Object Notation).
7 MQTT Broker url Value: broker.hivemq.com The URL of the MQTT broker where the diagnostic data will be sent.
8 TCP port Value: 1883 The TCP port used to connect to the MQTT broker. Port 1883 is the default port for MQTT.
9 Topic Value: 37A26230014/connectionDiagnostics The MQTT topic under which the diagnostic data will be published. This topic is used to categorize and identify the data.


Connection status and management:

To setup a connection,

Click on ‘Add new target’

Enter Target IP (Ex: 8.8.8.8)

Click ‘Add’

Target has been added successfully.

Application Start/Stop:

To check whether the target Ip is sending and receiving packets, you need to start the application to see the desired output.

As shown above, our target Ip is sending packets successfully.

You can Add as many target IP’s you need to monitor.

You can leave the application on for monitoring else ‘Stop’ the application.

5.10 Package Manager

A Package Manager is a tool or interface used to manage software packages (applications, libraries, tools) on a system.

The package manager interface you are looking at likely allows you to manage the software installed on your device, such as networking tools, firmware, or other applications relevant to your system.

This section has 3 sub-sections,

Installed APP

Available APP

Manual Upgrade

Installed APP:

When you select Installed APP, you will see all the software that is actively running or installed on the device.

This could include system utilities, network management tools, monitoring software, or any third-party apps that were previously installed.

Common Actions:

  • View Details: You can check each application's version, source, and installation date.
  • Uninstall: You can remove applications that are no longer needed.
  • Check for Updates: You can see if there are updates available for any installed application.


Available APP:

When you select Available APP, you will see a list of software that can be installed from the system's repositories or sources.

These applications are not yet installed but are ready for installation if needed.


Common Actions:

  • Install: You can install any of the available applications by selecting them.
  • View Details: You can review each application's description, version, and functionality before installing.
  • Search: You can search for specific apps by name or category.


Manual Upgrade:

In contrast to automatic updates, Manual Upgrade lets you take control over which packages or applications you want to upgrade and when.

This can be useful if you need to avoid upgrading certain apps due to compatibility or testing purposes, or if you want to perform updates at a specific time.

Common Actions:

  • Check for Updates: The system will check for available updates for installed apps.
  • Select Updates: You can select which packages to update manually.
  • Upgrade Now: You can start the upgrade process immediately for selected apps.


6.Configuration

These are gateway features that can be configured as per requirements.

It is divided into 5 sections,

1.) Source Configuration

2.) Send Configuration

3.) Port Configuration

4.) Cloud Configuration

5.) Modbus Configuration

6.1 Source Configuration

These configurations ensure that the system regularly acquires data from various interfaces at specified intervals, allowing for efficient monitoring and management of connected devices and sensors.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Enable RS485Line1 Enable/Disable This option enables the RS485 Line 1 interface for energy meter readings.
2 Overall Periodicity of RS485 Line 1 Energy meter Readings (In Seconds >= 60) Value: 120 Defines the interval in seconds at which readings are taken from the RS485 Line 1 energy meter. The minimum allowable interval is 60 seconds.
3 Delay between each Energy meter Readings (in Milliseconds) Value: 2000 Specifies the delay in milliseconds between individual readings from the energy meter on RS485 Line 1.

Click on save once changes have been made.

6.2 Send Configuration

Send configuration allows to choose type of string that should be sent to a cloud platform.

SILBO devices do offer 3 different options as shown below.

CSV (CSV allows fixed CSV)

Fixed JSON

Editable JSON. (JSON option is the editable JSON option)

Data sender Configuration is divided into major 2 parts,

JSON

CSV

JSON is further divided into 1 category,

Modbus Sender:

Select the field input you wish to add from the ‘Field Content tab’.

Give a desired JSON Key Name you wish to publish in the ‘Field JSON Key Name’ tab.

Once configured, click on Add.

JSON option allows editable JSON in which we can change which parameters should be sent and what name we should use to the tag.

What changes we can do in JSON edit to the above list.

Let’s change slave_id to some other name as “Slave number”.


Even custom fields can be added, for example if location name should be sent by router/gateway in JSON packet then it can be configured as shown.

CSV:

This option sends data packets in CSV (Comma-Separated Values) format.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Device ID GRD44B-5R A unique identifier for the device.
2 Record Start Mark [ This character marks the beginning of a data record. It's used to indicate where a new data record starts in the transmitted packet.
3 Record End Mark ] This character marks the end of a data record. It signals the end of the data for one record before a new one starts.
4 Register Start Mark < This character marks the beginning of a register within a data record. A register typically represents an individual data field within the record.
5 Register End Mark > This character marks the end of a register within a data record. It indicates where the data for a particular field end.
6 Invalid Data Character N Used to indicate that the data for a particular register is invalid or could not be collected. This helps in identifying which data points are not usable.
7 Failure Data Character NA Used to indicate that there was a failure in collecting or processing the data for a particular register. It signifies that an error occurred, and the data point could not be obtained.

Click on save once changes are made.

6.3 Port Configuration

Serial port configuration involves setting parameters for serial communication, allowing data exchange between devices via serial ports.

Port Configuration is divided into 4 port mode,

Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client

Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server

Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave

Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave

Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Port Mode Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Client Configures the serial port to send data directly to a remote TCP client without any additional protocol layers, making it "transparent."
2 Transparent Serial Port Mode 1.) raw

2.) rawlp

3.) telnet

4.) off

1.) It's a straightforward data transfer where the serial data is sent as-is.

2.) "Rawlp" stands for "raw with local processing". Typically, it involves some minimal local processing before transmission.

3.) This allows the serial connection to be accessed and managed over a Telnet session.

4.) The "off" mode disables the transparent serial port functionality.

3 Time Out no time out Ensures that the serial port does not time out, meaning it will continuously wait for data without closing the connection due to inactivity.
4 Local Listener TCP Port 3040 Sets the TCP port number to 3040 for the local listener to accept incoming TCP connections.
5 Baud Rate 9600 This is a common baud rate for serial communication, balancing speed and reliability.
6 No Of Stopbits 1 Configures the serial communication to use 1 stop bit, which is a common setting ensuring the end of each byte is clearly marked.
7 No Of Databits 8 Sets the number of bits in each transmitted byte to 8.
8 Parity 1.) None

2.) Even

3.) Odd

4.) Space

5.) Mark

1.) No parity bit is added to the data byte.

2.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.

3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.

4.) The parity bit is always set to 0, regardless of the data.

5.) The parity bit is always set to 1, regardless of the data.

9 Flow Control 1.) RTSCTS

2.) NONE

3.) DTRDSR

4.) XONXOFF

1.) Request to Send / Clear to Send

2.) No flow control is used.

3.) Data Terminal Ready / Data Set Ready

4.) Software flow control using specific control characters (XON and XOFF) to manage data flow.

10 Read Trace Enable/Disable Enables logging of data being read from the serial port.
11 Write Trace Enable/Disable Enables logging of data being written to the serial port.

Click on save once configuration changes are made.


Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server:

Configures the port to act as a bridge, converting serial data into TCP packets sent to a remote TCP server.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Port Mode Transparent Serial to Remote TCP Server Defines how the serial port will operate in relation to the remote server.
2 Remote Server IP Ex: 192.168.10.1 Field must not be empty: This is a required field, and you must provide a valid IP address for proper communication.
3 Remote Server Port Ex: 1883 Field must not be empty: This is a required field, and you must specify the correct port number used by the server.
4 Transparent Serial Port Mode 1.) raw

2.) rawlp

3.) telnet

4.) off

1.) It's a straightforward data transfer where the serial data is sent as-is.

2.) "Rawlp" stands for "raw with local processing". Typically, it involves some minimal local processing before transmission.

3.) This allows the serial connection to be accessed and managed over a Telnet session.

4.) The "off" mode disables the transparent serial port functionality.

5 Time Out no time out Ensures that the serial port does not time out, meaning it will continuously wait for data without closing the connection due to inactivity.
6 Local Listener Interface IP Address Field must not be empty: This is a required field for specifying which local IP address will be used for listening.
7 Local Listener TCP Port 3040 The TCP port number on the local device that will be used to listen for incoming data.
8 Baud Rate 9600 Standard baud rate, common for many serial devices.
9 No Of Stopbits 1 Indicates that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
10 No Of Databits 8 Indicates that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
11 Parity 1.) None

2.) Even

3.) Odd

4.) Space

5.) Mark

1.) No parity bit is added to the data byte.

2.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.

3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.

4.) The parity bit is always set to 0, regardless of the data.

5.) The parity bit is always set to 1, regardless of the data.

12 Flow Control 1.) RTSCTS

2.) NONE

3.) DTRDSR

4.) XONXOFF

1.) Request to Send / Clear to Send

2.) No flow control is used.

3.) Data Terminal Ready / Data Set Ready

4.) Software flow control using specific control characters (XON and XOFF) to manage data flow.

13 Read Trace Enable/Disable Option to enable tracing of incoming data from the serial port, useful for debugging.
14 Write Trace Enable/Disable Option to enable tracing of outgoing data from the serial port, useful for debugging.

Click on save once configuration changes are made.


Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave:

Configures the serial port to function as a Modbus TCP Master that communicates with a Modbus RTU Slave over the serial connection.

This setup is used to send Modbus TCP commands to a Modbus RTU device via a serial-to-TCP gateway.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Port Mode Modbus TCP Master to Modbus RTU Slave This setup is used to send Modbus TCP commands to a Modbus RTU device via a serial-to-TCP gateway.
2 Baud Rate 9600 The speed at which data is transmitted over the serial connection.
3 Parity 1.) None

2.) Even

3.) Odd

1.) No parity bit is used, meaning no additional error-checking bits are included.

2.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.

3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.

4 No of Stopbits 1 Indicates that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
5 No of Databits 8 Indicates that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
6 Local Listener Interface IP Address Field must not be empty: You need to provide a valid IP address where the TCP connections will be received.
7 TCP Port 502 This is the standard port for Modbus TCP communication.
8 Max. Number of Retries 5 The maximum number of times to retry sending a request if the initial attempt fails.
9 Delay Between Each Request (In milliseconds) 500 The delay between consecutive Modbus requests to avoid overwhelming the system or device.
10 Response Wait Time (In milliseconds) 500 The maximum time to wait for a response from the Modbus RTU Slave before considering the request failed.
11 Connection Timeout (In seconds) 0 A value of 0 typically means no timeout is set, so the system will wait indefinitely.
12 Inactivity Timeout (In seconds) The time to wait before closing a connection if no activity is detected.

Click on save once configuration changes have been made.

Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave:

Configures the serial port to function as a Modbus RTU Master that communicates with a Modbus TCP Slave over a network. This setup is used to send Modbus RTU commands from a master device to a Modbus TCP device via a TCP-to-serial gateway.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Port Mode Modbus RTU Master to Modbus TCP Slave This setup is used to send Modbus RTU commands from a master device to a Modbus TCP device via a TCP-to-serial gateway.
2 Baud Rate 9600 The speed at which data is transmitted over the serial connection.
3 Parity 1.) None

2.) Even

3.) Odd

1.) No parity bit is used, meaning no additional error-checking bits are included.

2.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is even.

3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.

4 No of Stopbits 1 Indicates that one stop bit is used, which is standard for most serial communications.
5 No of Databits 8 Indicates that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
6 TCP Slave Address Field must not be empty The IP address of the Modbus TCP Slave device to which the master will send requests.
7 TCP Slave Port Field must not be empty The port number on the Modbus TCP Slave device for receiving Modbus requests.
8 Max. Number of Retries 5 The maximum number of times to retry sending a request if the initial attempt fails.
9 Delay Between Each Request (In milliseconds) Field must not be empty The delay between consecutive Modbus requests to avoid overwhelming the system.
10 Response Wait Time (In milliseconds) 500 The maximum time to wait for a response from the Modbus TCP Slave before considering the request failed.
11 Connection Timeout (In seconds) 0 A value of 0 typically means no timeout is set, so the system will wait indefinitely.
12 Inactivity Timeout (In seconds) Field must not be empty The time to wait before closing a connection if no activity is detected.

Click on save once configuration changes have been made.

6.4 Cloud Configuration

In this section you can select the protocol by which you need to send data to cloud.

There are 3 Cloud/Protocol available,

HTTP

MQTT

Azure

HTTP Cloud/Protocol:

This configuration sets up communication between your device and cloud service using the HTTP cloud.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Site ID Ex: ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’. A unique identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
2 Cloud / Protocol HTTP The protocol used for communication with the cloud service.
3 HTTP URL Example: www.httpbin.org/post The endpoint URL of the cloud service where data will be sent.
4 HTTP Port (Optional) Leave it blank for the default port. The port number for the HTTP connection. This is optional because the default port for HTTP (80) is used if not specified.
5 Enable Authentication Enable/Disable Enable this if your cloud service requires a username and password.
6 Username Example: admin The username for authentication with the cloud service.
7 Password ***** The password for authentication with the cloud service.
8 Enable Server Response Validation Enable/Disable Enable this if you need to verify that the server's response is valid.
9 Server Response Ex: RecordID or custom A unique identifier for the record being sent to the cloud service.
10 Method 1.) Post

2.) Get

1.) The HTTP method used for sending data to the cloud service.

2.) The HTTP method used for requesting data from the cloud service.

MQTT Cloud/Protocol:

This configuration sets up communication between your device and a cloud service using the MQTT protocol.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Site ID Example: ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’. A unique identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
2 Cloud / Protocol MQTT The protocol used for communication with the cloud service.
3 MQTT Host Example: broker.hivemq.com The MQTT broker's address (hostname or IP address) that the device will connect to for sending and receiving messages.
4 MQTT Port Example: 1883 This is the default port for unencrypted MQTT connections.
5 Authentication Mode 1.) No Authentication

2.) Username/Password

3.) TLS

1.) Connect to the broker without any credentials.

2.) The Username/Password for authentication with the cloud service.

3.) Upload TLS certificates only if TLS authentication is selected as shown in the above image.

6 Enable Publish Over LAN Enable/Disable When enabled, the device will also publish MQTT messages over the local area network (LAN).
7 RS485 Topic (Optional) Example: RS485Data1 The MQTT topic for publishing RS485 data.
8 Command Request Topic (Optional) Example: CommandRequest1 The topic to which the device listens for command requests. Leave it blank if not in use.
9 Command Response Topic (Optional) Example: CommandResponse1 The topic on which the device publishes responses to commands. Leave it blank if not in use.

Click on save once configuration changes have been made.


Azure:

This configuration sets up the connection to Azure IoT Hub using either MQTT or HTTP protocols with a specified connection string.

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Site ID Example: ‘Site123’ or ‘Device456’. A unique identifier for your site or device within the cloud service.
2 Cloud / Protocol Azure The cloud service and protocol used for communication.
3 Protocol 1.) MQTT

2.) HTTP

1.) A lightweight messaging protocol suitable for IoT devices.

2.) A protocol used for communication over the web, commonly used for RESTful services.

4 Connection String e.g., invendis-iot-hub.azure-devices.net. The primary or secondary key used to authenticate the device with the IoT Hub.

Click on save once configuration changes have been made.

6.5 Modbus Configuration

Modbus Configuration involves setting up communication parameters for Modbus devices, including baud rate, parity, stop bits, data bits, TCP/RTU settings, and timeout/retry settings for reliable data exchange.

Click on “Add Device” to start a new configuration.

This Configuration has 4 sections,

1.) Parameter Configuration

2.) Block Config

3.) Register Config

4.) Alarm/Event Config

Parameter Configuration:

As shown in the image below, there are two types of protocol used in Modbus configuration.

1.) RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)

2.) TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)

Details of both protocols is mentioned in the specification table.


Modbus Protocol: RTU

Specification details are given below:

Modbus protocol: RTU
1 DEVICE NAME Ex: Invendis This is the name assigned to the Modbus device for identification purposes.
2 Baud rate 300 | 1200 | 1800 | 2400 | 4800 | 19200 | 38400 | default: 9600 The baud rate determines the communication speed between devices, measured in bits per second.
3 Parity 1.) NONE

2.) ODD

3.) EVEN

1.) No parity bit is added to the data byte.

2.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in

the data byte plus the parity bit is even.

3.) Ensures that the total number of 1-bits in the data byte plus the parity bit is odd.

4 Meter ID 1 The Meter ID is a unique identifier for the specific meter within the network. Each Modbus device on the network must have a unique ID to differentiate it from others.
5 Meter Model Example: abcd This field specifies the model of the meter.
6 Port number RS485 Port-1 This specifies which RS485 port on the device is being used for communication.
7 Slave Address Example: 1 The slave address identifies the specific slave device on the Modbus network. Each slave must have a unique address so that the master can communicate with it individually.
8 No. of Databits 7/8 Indicates that 8 data bits are used per byte, which is a common setting.
9 No. of Stopbits 1/2 Configures the serial communication to use 1 stop bit, which is a common setting ensuring the end of each byte is clearly marked.

Modbus Protocol: TCP

Specification details are given below:

Modbus protocol: TCP
1 DEVICE NAME Ex: Invendis This is the name assigned to the Modbus device for identification purposes.
2 Modbus Comm IP Ex: 192.168.10.147 IP of the device you are communicating with.
3 Modbus Comm Port Ex: 502 (default) Give a specified TCP port number
4 Modbus Comm Timeout Ex: 60 This refers to the maximum amount of time the master device will wait for a response from a slave device before it assumes a communication failure.
5 Meter ID 1 The Meter ID is a unique identifier for the specific meter within the network. Each Modbus device on the network must have a unique ID to differentiate it from others.
6 Meter Model Example: abcd This field specifies the model of the meter.
7 Slave Address Example: 1 The slave address identifies the specific slave device on the Modbus network. Each slave must have a unique address so that the master can communicate with it individually.


Block Config:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Funtion Code read coils (1)

read input coils (2)

read holding registers (3)

read input registers (4)

The function code indicates the operation to be performed. In Modbus, each operation has a specific function code.
2 Start Register Example: 0 The start register indicates the address of the first register to be read in the slave device.
3 Register Count Example: 10 This specifies the number of consecutive registers to read starting from the start register.

Click on “Add Block” below to add another set of parameters.


Register Config:

In this section you can add multiple parameters to read in ‘Default Mapping’ & ‘Custom Mapping’ field.


*Refer the image below*

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Default mapping 1.) Tag Name = (Ex: FQ)

2.) Data type = Hexadecimal; Floating point | Floating point (Swapped Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first | 16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT, high byte first | 16bit UINT, low byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1) | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit INT (byte order 4,3,2,1)

1.) Input value name.

2.) Defines how read data will be stored.

2 Custom mapping 1.) Register name:

2.) Start register:

3.) Register count:

4.) Data type = Hexadecimal; Floating point | Floating point (Swapped Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first | 16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT, high byte first | 16bit UINT, low byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1) | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit INT (byte order 4,3,2,1); 1 bit

1.) Input value name.

2.) First register in custom register block.

3.) Path to file in which the custom register block will be stored.

4.) Defines how read data will be stored.


In Register Config,

Click on ‘Add’ to add new parameters.

Click on ‘Show JSON’ to view an example value of how the data will be presented.

Click on ‘Add Device’ once configuration changes have been made.

Alarm/Event Config:

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Category 1.) Alarm

2.) Event

Alarm: Specifies that the configuration is for an alarm, which typically triggers when certain conditions are met.

Event: Specifies that the configuration is for an event, which might log information or trigger actions without necessarily being an alarm.

2 Status 1.) Enabled

2.) Disabled

Enabled: Activates the alarm or event, making it operational.

Disabled: Deactivates the alarm or event, making it non-operational.

3 Name Ex: vtg The name or identifier for the alarm/event.
4 Function code read coils (1)

read input coils (2)

read holding registers (3)

read input registers (4)

These function codes are typically based on the Modbus protocol, indicating what type of data is being monitored.
5 Start Register Ex: 0 The address of the first register to monitor.
6 No_of Reg Ex: 10 The number of consecutive registers to monitor from the starting register.
7 Data Type Hexadecimal; Floating point | Floating point (Swapped Byte) | 16bit INT, high byte first | 16bit INT, low byte first | 16bit UINT, high byte first | 16bit UINT, low byte first | 32bit UINT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit UINT (byte order 4,3,2,1) | 32bit INT (byte order 1,2,3,4) | 32bit INT (byte order 4,3,2,1); Boolean Provides options for the type of data being monitored, such as integer, float, Boolean, etc.
8 Upper Thresh/

Alarm Value

Ex: 2 The value at which the alarm is triggered if the monitored parameter exceeds this upper threshold.
9 Upper Hys Ex: 2 This value is subtracted from the upper threshold to set the point at which the alarm resets, preventing rapid toggling.
10 Lower Thresh Ex: 2 The value at which the alarm is triggered if the monitored parameter falls below this lower threshold.
11 Lower Hys Ex: 1 This value is added to the lower threshold to set the point at which the alarm resets, preventing rapid toggling.

Click on “Add Alarm” to add another Alarm/Event.

Click on ‘Show JSON’ to view an example value of how the data will be presented.

Click on ‘Add Device’ once configuration changes have been made.

7. Appmanager

Appmanager is a system utility that manages the installation, configuration, and execution of software applications on a device.

This section is divided into 6 categories,

  • Application Start/Stop
  • Application Software Upgrade
  • Modbus Utility Configuration
  • Import/Export Application Configurations
  • App Health Status
  • IO Utilities

7.1 Application Start/Stop

All changes made in ‘Configuration’ section should be saved into backend and to do that navigate to Appmanager >> Application Start/Stop.

Click on update to save all the changes made in configuration section.

Once updated click on start.

Make sure application is started to send data to cloud, once started it can be seen start option is replaced by Stop as shown above.

7.2 Application Software Upgrade

In this section you can upgrade software manually or automatically.

For auto upgrade, enable auto upgrade tab,

This is further divided into 2 sections,

Client and server settings

Auto Upgrade Interval

Specification details are given below:

Client and server settings
SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Authentication Enable/Disable Enable if username/password is required.
2 Username XXXX The username required to authenticate with the server.
3 Password XXXX The password required to authenticate with the server.
4 Server address ftp://XXXX The URL or IP address of the server where the upgrade files are located.
5 Connection timeout Ex: 180 The maximum time (in seconds) the system will wait to establish a connection with the server before timing out.
6 Operation timeout Ex: 240 The maximum time (in seconds) the system will wait for the upgrade operation to complete before timing out.
Auto Upgrade Interval
SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Minutes Example: 56 Set the minute part of the interval when the auto-upgrade check will occur
2 Day Of Month Example: all Specifies the days of the month when the auto-upgrade check should occur.
3 Month Example: all Specifies the months during which the auto-upgrade check should occur
4 Day Of Week Example: all Specifies the days of the week when the auto-upgrade check should occur.

You can also check the current software version and manually upgrade software as shown below.


To Manually upgrade Application,

Enter the correct ‘Checksum’ and ‘Size’ and upgrade the page.

(Please stop the applications before upgrading)

7.3 Modbus Utility Configuration

Any changes to be made in Modbus Configuration to test can be made in Modbus Utility Configuration without disturbing the actual Modbus Configuration.

The working process of ‘Modbus Configuration’ and ‘Modbus Utility Configuration’ are same.

Refer (6.5 Modbus Configuration) for specification details.

Click on save once configuration changes have been made.

7.4 Import / Export Gateway Configuration

This functionality ensures that you can easily manage, back up, and restore device gateway

configurations, as well as reset the device to default settings when needed.

Export Config:

Usage: Click the "Export Config" button to save the current configuration to a file.


Import Config:

Usage: Click the "Import Config" button and select the text file containing the configuration you want to import.


Reset Config:

Usage: Click the "Reset Config" button to revert the device to its default configuration settings.

7.5 App Health Status

This section provides utilities to check the health and status of various applications and data inputs

within the system. It allows monitoring of the last data produced and sent times for different utilities, as

well as the running status of applications.

*Refer the image below*

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Energymeter Last Data Produced Time Command ‘Read’ Displays the last time data was produced by the energymeter.
2 DIO Last Data Produced Time Command ‘Read’ Displays the last time data was produced by the digital input/output system.
3 Energymeter Last Data Sent Time Command ‘Read’ Displays the last time data from the energymeter was sent.
4 App Running Status Command ‘Read’ Displays the current running status of applications.
5 Download Files Command ‘Download’ Choose the desired option from the dropdown menu.

Download data or logs related to the options available.

6 Output Display Value Provides output or feedback based on selected utilities.


7.6 IO Utilities

This section provides output of various utilities connected to the device.

This section exactly shows whether the connection made is successful or not.


*Refer the image below*

Specification details are given below:

SN Field Name Sample Value Description
1 Modbus Utility Input: Slave ID Action: Manage RS485 energy meters by specifying the slave ID. (Read/Write)
2 Output Print any values Action: Will display the results or status messages based on the actions performed using the utilities.

8.Logout

The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.